JP6664831B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed to transition to the ART state with a high probability when a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. . For example, in Patent Document 1, when a specific symbol combination (RT activated symbol 1) is aimed at in a chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, a high RT having a high probability that replay is an internal winning combination is high. A gaming machine that performs control for shifting to (i) is disclosed.

JP 2013-048945 A

  In such a gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, the interest of the player in the chance zone concentrates on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a chance that the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such a possibility may be significantly reduced. In such a case, for the player, no chance is obtained even though the player has shifted to the chance zone, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to:

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. A first symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed at the time of the correct answer in the pressing order) or a second symbol combination (for example, bell spilling eyes) is determined according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations including a pressing sequence (for example, a pressing sequence bell) which can be stopped and displayed; Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to the reel and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning determined by the internal winning combination determining means. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the role and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, thereby stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. A combination of a reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 41) and a symbol stopped on an effective line provided in the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. A winning determination unit (for example, the main control circuit 41) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination unit based on the internal winning combination based on the predetermined condition; A lottery state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for starting a transitional lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a shift lottery of whether or not to perform the operation, and the internal winning combination determination means in the advantageous state lottery state for the pushing. A first transition lottery that determines with a predetermined probability that the transition to the advantageous state is made when the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination (for example, a transition lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ). Is performed, and after a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 30 games) elapse in the advantageous state lottery state, a second transition lottery (for example, when the CZ completes an ART, The advantage state lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for performing the transfer lottery, and the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game in which the first transfer lottery is performed. The first transition lottery is invalidated regardless of the transition lottery result, and when the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game, the lottery that maintains the first transition lottery result is performed. In the advantageous state lottery state, the first transition lottery is performed, and the first transition lottery is performed by the lottery result management unit. When the winning result is maintained, or when the predetermined number of unit games have elapsed, the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub control circuit 42) for ending the advantageous state lottery state, and the first shift lottery or the When the transition to the advantageous state is determined by the 2 transition lottery, an advantageous state transition means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for transitioning the state of playing a game to the advantageous state is provided. Is a more advantageous state (for example, more advantageous) than the case where it is decided to make the transition to the advantageous state by the first transition lottery when it is decided to make the transition to the advantageous state by the second transition lottery. such ART state ART gaming state) is shifted in, the invalid number of nullifying the first transition lottery in an advantageous state lottery state (e.g., disabled count determines the invalid point) determined Stage (e.g., the sub-control circuit 42) further wherein the lottery result management unit, regardless of the symbol combination displayed on the active line on, disabling the first transition lottery only the invalid number Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which a transition to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is performed, the first pressing is determined as an internal winning combination when the first pressing combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A transfer lottery is performed. The advantageous state lottery state ends when the first transition lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained or when a predetermined number of unit games elapse. As described above, in the gaming machine that performs the transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive the first transition lottery at all during the advantageous state lottery state. In the gaming machine, the second shift lottery is performed when a predetermined number of unit games elapse in the advantageous state lottery state. Thereby, even if the pressing sequence is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, the transition lottery to the advantageous state can be always received, and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. .

Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the pressing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination, but the first shift lottery is performed when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation. Is invalidated, and conversely, when the second symbol combination is displayed, the result of the first shift lottery is maintained. According to such control, the player is interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the pushing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore, the interest in each game in the advantageous state lottery state is increased. Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state in which the transition is made via the second transition lottery is more advantageous than the advantage state in which the transition is made via the first transition lottery. It is desired that a predetermined number of unit games elapse without the combination being displayed (the first shift lottery is maintained and the advantageous state lottery state is ended), and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state is maintained to the end. it can.
In addition, the result of the first shift lottery becomes invalid as long as the number of invalidations remains, so that it is possible to prevent the advantageous state lottery state from ending. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance of receiving the second shift lottery which is more advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state lottery state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general game state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which the game is played. And a lottery state start means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous state upon a predetermined condition. When the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, the first transition lottery (for example, the transition lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ) that determines to transition to the advantageous state with a predetermined probability is performed. When a predetermined number of unit games (e.g., 30 games) elapse in the advantageous state lottery state, a second shift lottery (e.g., Advantageous state lottery means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for performing ART transfer lottery performed when Z is completed, and a predetermined display mode (for example, displayed when the push order is correct) in the unit game in which the first transfer lottery is performed. The combination of symbols to be performed), the first transition lottery is invalidated regardless of the transition lottery result to the advantageous state, and when a specific display mode (for example, bell spilling eyes) is reached in the unit game, the first transition lottery is canceled. A lottery result management means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for maintaining a lottery result of the first transition lottery; the first transition lottery is performed in the advantageous state lottery state; A lottery state ending means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for ending the advantageous state lottery state when the lottery result of the shift lottery is maintained or when the predetermined number of unit games elapses; When the shifting to the advantageous state is determined by the serial first transition lottery or the second transition lottery, advantageous state shift means for shifting the state of performing a game in the preferred state (e.g., the sub-control circuit 42), An invalid number counting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) capable of counting an invalid number (for example, invalid point) for invalidating the first shift lottery in the advantageous state lottery state, and the lottery result managing means is provided. Even in the case of the specific display mode, the first shift lottery is invalidated only for the invalid number of times.

  As a result, the result of the first shift lottery is invalid as long as the number of invalidations remains, so that it is possible to prevent the advantageous state lottery state from ending. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance of receiving the second shift lottery which is more advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state lottery state.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a second mode in which the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous state in the first shift lottery based on the number of unit games passed in the advantageous state lottery state is higher than the second mode. A first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) that shifts to (for example, CZ mode 1) and a second mode that does not shift to the first mode in which the probability is higher than the first mode and the probability is lower than the first mode. And a mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the transition from the first mode to the second mode during the advantageous state lottery state does not cause the subsequent transition from the second mode to the first mode. As the number of unit games increases, the probability of winning the first shift lottery increases. From the viewpoint of the player, since it is desirable that the advantageous state lottery state continues for a long time, the player will be strongly interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the advantageous state lottery state You can improve the interest in the inside.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of a game can be improved during the predetermined period which is a trigger to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachislo concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a whole perspective view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the said pachislo. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub control circuit of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachislo. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure for explaining an outline of an internal winning combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure for explaining an outline of an internal winning combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing the display combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a pressing order storage area provided in a main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the sub control circuit of the said pachislo. It is a figure showing a part of the correspondence between the type of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachislot and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the said pachislot liquid crystal display device. It is a schematic diagram of the shift lottery between the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART lottery table at the time of start memorized by sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART lottery table at the time of start memorized by sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART lottery table at the time of start memorized by sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse operation lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. 9 is a MAP data correspondence table showing MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the ART random determination table at the time of reel stop stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the high probability game state of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the avoidance point lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in CZ of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing the CZ_MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing the CZ mode defined in CZ_MAP. It is a figure showing the invalid point lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure which shows the CZ effect ball lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART random determination table in CZ memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing a part of the correspondence between the type of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachislot and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub-control circuit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in BB of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART random determination table at the time of the start during BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the BB mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the BB mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of completion | finish during BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game during ART of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game during ART of the said pachislot. It is a diagram showing an ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the boss MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a boss MAP data correspondence table showing boss MAP data defined in boss MAP. It is a figure which shows the rendering ball lottery table during the enemy determination ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the rendering ball lottery table during the enemy determination ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the performance ball upgrade lottery table during the enemy determination ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the enemy-determined ART middle ally power addition lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the enemy determination ART boss power lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a boss status correspondence table showing the status of the opponent in the battle ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a battle MAP data correspondence table showing battle MAP data specified in battle MAP. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table during battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the damage random determination table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the damage random determination table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a diagram showing an ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a diagram showing an ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check processing of the said pachislo. It is a flow chart which shows the bonus operation check processing of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption processing of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the power supply process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination processing of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of the normal start of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the apocalypse operation processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability game state transition process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high-probability effect registration processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing at the time of CZ start of the sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows ART random determination processing during BB of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the enemy decision ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during battle ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the winning operation command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of normal termination of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability shift determination processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability completion | finish determination processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ lottery result management processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the bonus end command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislo.

  Hereinafter, a pachislo showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small role with a ramp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability is higher than a normal time during a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot provided with an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT operates simultaneously is described.

[Function flow of pachislot]
As shown in FIG. 1, when the player inserts a medal and operates the start lever 16, the pachislot 1 is set to one value (eg, 0 to 65535) of random numbers in a predetermined numerical range. Hereinafter, a random value is extracted.

  The internal winning combination determination means (main CPU 51 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. In other words, the internal winning combination determining means detects the start operation of the unit game with respect to the start lever 16 by the start switch 16S (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition) at a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations. Determine the internal winning combination.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along a winning line described later is determined. In addition, as the types of symbol combinations, there are provided a type in which a privilege such as payout of a medal, an operation of a replay (replay), an operation of a bonus, or the like is given to a player, and another type related to a so-called "losing". Have been.

  Subsequently, after the rotation of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed, when the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 51 described later) causes the internal winning combination to occur. Based on the timing at which the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Here, in the pachi-slot 1, basically, the control of stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number of symbols is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). ).

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the symbol combination related to the winning is determined, the reel combination control unit uses the specified time to change the symbol combination along the winning line as an active line. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols for which display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, reels are set within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as not to be displayed along the pay line by using the specified time. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  When the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are all stopped, the winning determination unit (main CPU 51 described later) determines whether the combination of the symbols displayed along the winning line is related to the winning. It determines whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether a winning combination has been achieved or not based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the winning line based on the stop of the symbol change by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the game is related to a winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot 1.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation, and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed next to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislo 1, in the above-described series of flows, the display of an image performed by a display device such as the liquid crystal display device 10, the output of light performed by various lamps (lamp 20 described later), and the sound performed by speakers 21 </ b> L and 21 </ b> R. Various effects are performed using the output of the above or a combination thereof.

  When the start lever 16 is operated by the player, in addition to the random number value used for determining the above-described internal winning combination, a random number value for other lottery processing and effects (hereinafter, a random number value for effects) is extracted. Is done.

  When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means (sub CPU 81 described later) randomly determines the effect content to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means determines whether or not there is a winning when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and when the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. The performance of the production is advanced in conjunction with each opportunity such as when it is touched.

  As described above, in the pachislot 1, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination, that is, the combination of the symbols to be aimed. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

[Pachislot structure]
Next, the structure of the pachislot according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a view showing an internal structure of the pachislot 1.

<Appearance structure>
As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot 1 includes a cabinet 1a that accommodates reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 1b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 1a. Inside the cabinet 1a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are arranged in a row in a horizontal direction (a direction orthogonal to the reel rotation direction). Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively.

  Each reel (display row) has a cylindrical reel body and a light-transmissive sheet material mounted on a peripheral surface (circular surface) of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are continuously drawn on the surface of the sheet material along the circumferential direction of the reel body.

  A liquid crystal display device 10 is provided at the center of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display device 10 has a display screen including a display window 4 for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The display window 4 is made of, for example, a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. As shown in FIG. 2, the display window 4 is provided at a position overlapping the three reel arrangement areas when viewed from the front (the player side). It is provided so as to be located closer to the one reel (player side). Therefore, the symbols drawn on the three reels provided behind the display window 4 can be viewed through the display window 4.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window 4 is stopped, the display window 4 displays three consecutively arranged symbols among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel. It is configured to be able to. That is, the upper, middle, and lower regions are provided in the frame of the display window 4 for each reel, and one symbol can be displayed in each region. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the symbols are displayed in the frame of the display window 4 in a 3 × 3 arrangement form. In the present embodiment, a pseudo line formed by combining the upper part of the reel 3L, the middle part of the reel 3C, and the lower part of the reel 3R among the three regions consisting of the upper part, the middle part, and the lower part of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Is defined as a line (prize line) to be determined whether or not a winning is achieved.

  A 7-segment display 6 including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 10. The 7-segment display 6 displays the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as the inserted number), the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), and deposited inside the pachislot 1. Information such as the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits) is digitally displayed.

  The front door 1b is provided with various devices (medal slot 11, MAX bet button 12, 1 BET button 14, start lever 16, and stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) to be operated by the player.

  The medal insertion slot 11 is provided for receiving a medal inserted into the pachislot 1 from outside by a player. The medals accepted through the medal insertion slot 11 are inserted into one game with a predetermined number (for example, three) as an upper limit, and the amount exceeding the predetermined number can be deposited in the pachislot 1 (so-called “pachislot”). Credit function). In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in one game is three.

  The MAX bet button 12 and the 1-BET button 14 are provided for determining the number of medals deposited in the pachislot 1 to be inserted into one game. Although not shown in FIG. 2, a settlement button is provided on the front door 1b (disposed on the side of the start lever 16 opposite to the stop button side). The settlement button is provided for drawing out (discharging) medals stored in the pachislot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided for starting rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the front door 1b is provided with a medal payout port 18, a medal tray 19, a lamp 20, speakers 21L and 21R, and the like.

  The medal payout exit 18 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33 described below to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout exit 18. The lamp 20 is configured by an LED or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect content. The speakers 21L and 21R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effect.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 1b is opened, and shows a structure on the back side of the front door 1b and a structure inside the cabinet 1a.

  A main board 31 configuring a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 4) described later is provided in an upper part in the cabinet 1a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit for controlling main operations of the game in the pachislo 1 and a flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of presence / absence of winning, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in a central portion in the cabinet 1a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R in FIG. 4) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

  A medal dispensing device 33 (hereinafter, referred to as a hopper 33) is provided in a lower part of the cabinet 1a, and is capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging the medals one by one. Further, a power supply device 34 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachislot 1 is provided on one side (left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) of the hopper 33 in the cabinet 1a.

  On the back side of the front door 1b (the part opposite to the display screen side), above the area where the display window 4 is arranged, a sub-board that constitutes a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 32 are provided. The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Further, a selector 35 is provided on the back side of the front door 1b below the area where the display window 4 is arranged. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of a medal inserted from the outside via the medal insertion slot 11 are appropriate. The selector 35 guides the medal determined to be appropriate to the hopper 33. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35 </ b> S (see FIG. 4 described later) that detects that a proper medal has passed is provided on a path where the medal passes in the selector 35.

[Configuration of circuit provided in pachislot]
Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislo 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the entire circuit provided in the pachislo 1 and FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the internal structure of the sub control circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachislo 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these circuits.

<Main control circuit>
The main control circuit 41 is mainly constituted by a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display section drive circuit 64, and a hopper drive circuit 65, as shown in FIG. , And a payout completion signal circuit 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a clock pulse generating circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 51 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches, sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R.

  The stop switch 17S (stop operation detecting means) detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 14S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player.

  The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detecting means) detects that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 11 has passed through the selector 35. The bet switch 12S detects that a bet button (the MAX bet button 12 or the 1-BET button 14) has been pressed by the player.

  The peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50 include three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (symbol changing means), a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided respectively for the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a fixed angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel, and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, thereby determining the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, the number of reel symbols. Just rotated or not).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Each time a pulse counter outputs a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) necessary for rotation of one symbol, the value of a symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to “1”. Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 63 detects the reel index.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, the number of symbols that have been rotated since the reel index was detected is managed. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of sliding pieces during a game is set to four symbols. Therefore, for example, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed during the game, the symbol of the predetermined reel located in the corresponding area on the pay line in the display window 4 and the four reels up to that point are displayed. The symbols existing in the range are symbols that can be stopped in the area.

  The display drive circuit 64 included in the main control circuit 41 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the medal detection performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged from the hopper 33 to the outside reaches a predetermined number of payouts. I do.

<Sub-control circuit>
The sub-control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . The sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, a driver 86, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, It includes a / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, and a decorative member drive circuit 94.

  The sub CPU 81 controls output of video, sound, and light according to a control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in response to a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub-ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, the extraction of effect random numbers, determination of effect contents (effect data), and An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 10 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp 20, a speaker 21L. , 21R, etc., for controlling the output of sound.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data relating to video creation, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects. And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 10, the speakers 21L and 21R, the lamp 20, and the movable decorative member 22 are connected to the sub-control circuit 42. The operations of these peripheral devices are as follows. , Are controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and the created video is processed by the liquid crystal display device 10. Is displayed.

  Further, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A / D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers 21L and 21R according to sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp 20 according to the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

  The sub CPU 81 and the decorative member driving circuit 94 drive the movable decorative member 22 in accordance with the accessory driving data specified by the effect contents. The movable decorative member 22 is an effect member, and is usually provided around the liquid crystal display device 10, and is arranged so as to be hidden by a decorative portion (not shown) when the effect is not performed. Then, when a specific effect is performed, the movable decorative member 22 is driven by the decorative member driving circuit 94 and is exposed on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 10. Hereinafter, the movable decorative member 22 is referred to as a movable accessory 22.

[Main-side game state transition flow]
Next, a game state controlled by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) of the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment and a transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of a bonus, the type of an internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control circuit 41 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of a bonus (BB). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the state between the flags is a state in which the bonus is won and the bonus is not activated. Is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  Further, the main control circuit 41 provides six types of states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state in which the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that a combination relating to replay is determined as an internal winning combination has a low probability. In the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state, the combination relating to replay is an internal winning combination. Is a game state in which the probability determined as is the medium probability. In addition, the RT4 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a combination relating to replay is determined as an internal winning combination has a high probability, and is the most advantageous gaming state among bonus non-winning states.

  The main control circuit 41 distinguishes based on a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state, which are distinguished based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of a bonus, and an RT0 game distinguished based on the type of an internal winning combination related to replay and its winning probability. From the state to the RT5 gaming state, the main pachislot 1 gaming state is managed. More specifically, the main control circuit 41 determines that the gaming state in the pachislot 1 is a non-bonus winning state RT0 gaming state, a bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state, a bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state, and a bonus non-winning state. RT3 gaming state, RT4 gaming state with bonus non-winning state, RT5 gaming state with flag state, RT0 gaming state with bonus state, RT2 gaming state with bonus state, RT4 gaming state with bonus state, and RB gaming state with bonus state Are managed.

  Whether or not a bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 48 described later) provided in the main RAM 53. For example, if data 1 is stored in bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4, it means that a bonus has been won. Whether the bonus is activated or not and the RT gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 51 described later) provided in the main RAM 53. For example, when data 1 is stored in bit 3 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storage area, it means that the bonus (BB gaming state) is activated and the game is in the RT4 gaming state.

  RT0 gaming state in a bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of all bits of the gaming state flag storing area are 0) Is one of the basic gaming states in the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 6, from the bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state RT3 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state, and the inter-flag state. There is a possibility of transition to the RT5 gaming state.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, when the symbol combination relating to (1) Bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus is not won. To the RT1 gaming state. Note that the spilled bell is a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell when a pressing order bell described later is determined as an internal winning combination. The RT1 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order lip when the pressing order lip described later is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, when a symbol combination relating to (2) RT4 transition lip is displayed, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won. Note that the RT4 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order lip when the later-described pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, or described later. This is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_Chance Slip 2” or “F_Chance Slip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, when a symbol combination relating to (3) RT3 transition lip is displayed, the game shifts to the RT3 gaming state in which the bonus is not won. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip” described later is determined as an internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination relating to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state. The role related to BB is any of “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, and “F_white / white / red”. When the combination of these BBs is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination is carried over as an internal winning combination until the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed (that is, until the operation of the BB starts), so-called carryover. It is a role.

  Subsequently, the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 are 0, and data of bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is 0) 1) is one of the basic gaming states during the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from a non-bonus winning state RT1 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state and an inter-flag state RT5 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, (4) when the number of fixed games (five games in the present embodiment) elapses, the RT0 gaming in the bonus not-winning state is performed. Transition to the state. Further, in the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state.

  Further, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 1 of the gaming state flag storing area is 0) 1) is a gaming state in which the state may shift after the operation of the BB is completed. In the present embodiment, at the end of the bonus, the game shifts to the bonus non-winning state while the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state shifts when the bonus state ends in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Also, as shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from a non-bonus winning state RT2 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state and an inter-flag state RT5 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when (1) a combination of symbols related to the bell spilling is displayed, the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is displayed. Move to Also, in the RT2 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state.

  Further, the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 2 of the gaming state flag storing area is 0) 1) is a gaming state in which the combination relating to replay is more likely to be determined as an internal winning combination than the RT0 gaming state, which is the basic gaming state of the pachislot 1. As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from the non-bonus winning state RT3 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state and an inter-flag state RT5 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the RT3 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, (4) when the number of fixed games (five games in the present embodiment) elapses, the RT0 gaming in which the bonus is not won. Transition to the state. Further, in the RT3 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state.

  Also, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 3 of the gaming state flag storing area is 0) 1) is an advantageous state in which a combination related to replay is most likely to be determined as an internal winning combination, and a game can be played without reducing medals. As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from a non-bonus winning state RT4 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state and an inter-flag state RT5 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when a symbol combination related to (1) Bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state is displayed. To the RT1 gaming state. Also, in the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state.

  Further, the RT5 gaming state of the flag-to-flag state (any one of the bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and the bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 is 1 and the bit 4 of the gaming state storing area 4) The data 1) is a so-called BB flag in which a hand associated with BB is carried over as an internal winning combination, and is a game in which a combination of symbols according to the BB carried over as an internal winning combination is displayed. State. As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RT5 gaming state between the flags, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carried BB is displayed. When the BB is activated, the bonus state RT0 is displayed. Transition to the gaming state.

  The RT0 gaming state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) When BB is activated, it is a game state where the player stays first. During the bonus state, the game starts from the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state and shifts to another gaming state. As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from the bonus state RT0 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state and a bonus state RT4 gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the bonus RT0 gaming state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, a transition is made to the bonus non-winning RT0 gaming state (before and after the bonus ends). The RT gaming state is maintained). The operation of the BB ends when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 59.

  In the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, if the combination related to (7) JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. The role related to JACIN is any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” described later. Here, as shown in FIG. 26 described below, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, there is a high probability that the combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination (about 52%). Before the end, the combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, and the game shifts to the bonus state RT4 gaming state. When the combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination as the internal winning combination is displayed until the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed (that is, until the start of the RB operation). This is the so-called carryover role that is carried over.

  In the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state (the data of bits 1 to 3 in the internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0 and the data of bits 3 and 5 in the gaming state flag storing area are 1), the combination related to JACIN is performed. This is between so-called RB flags in the bonus state that are carried over as internal winning combinations. As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from the bonus state RT4 gaming state to the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state and the bonus state RB gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (before and after the bonus is over). The RT gaming state is maintained). In the bonus RT4 gaming state, (8) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carried JACIN is displayed, and when the RB is activated, the game shifts to the bonus RB gaming state.

  Also, the RB gaming state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bits 5 and 6 of the gaming state flag storing area are 0). The data 1) is a gaming state to which the game shifts when the RB operation starts during the bonus state. Note that, as shown in FIG. 22, which will be described later, in the RB gaming state in the bonus state, there is a high probability (about 65%) that “losing” is determined as the internal winning combination, which is basically disadvantageous. In the pachislot 1 in the form, during the bonus state, the game is played while the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state is maintained without displaying a combination of symbols according to the carried JACIN.

  As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from the bonus RB gaming state to a bonus non-winning RT2 gaming state and a bonus RT2 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the RB gaming state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the game shifts to the RT2 gaming state of the non-bonus winning state. In the RB gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (9) RB ends, the game shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. In the RB operation, a symbol combination other than “losing” is displayed eight times in the RB gaming state in the bonus state (eight wins), and 12 games are performed in the RB gaming state in the bonus state. Or that the operation of the BB ends, the operation ends.

  In addition, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 1 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area are set). The data of 1) is a gaming state which shifts after the RB gaming state in the bonus state. As shown in FIG. 6, there is a possibility that a transition from the bonus state RT2 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state and a bonus state RT4 gaming state. More specifically, in the bonus RT2 gaming state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, a transition is made to the non-bonus winning RT2 gaming state (the RT gaming state is maintained before and after the bonus ends). Also, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state, if the combination relating to (7) JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on each surface of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 21 symbol positions “0” to “20” and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol positions "0" to "20" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "20" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “white 7”, “red 7”, “BAR”, “lip 1”, “lip 2”, “lip 3”, “cherry 1”, “cherry 2”, “watermelon”, and “watermelon”. Bell ".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 allocates a symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (a symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) to the symbol position "0" and the reel 3L. , 3C, and 3R, in the order in which the symbols move in the rotation direction, symbol positions "0" to "20" are assigned to each of the 21 symbols.

  Thus, by using the middle of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 8, each symbol arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 8 indicates codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment are “white 7”, “red 7”, “BAR”, “lip 1”, “lip 2”, “lip 3”, “cherry 1”, There are 10 types, "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and "Bell".

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “white 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “red 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “0000011” is assigned as data to the “BAR” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for each of the "Lip 1", "Lip 2", "Lip 3", "Cherry 1", "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and "Bell" symbols (symbol codes 4 to 10), “0000100” to “00000010” are assigned as data.

<Symbol combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table includes a symbol combination (combination) determined in advance according to the type of privilege, data to be stored in the main RAM 53 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a symbol combination when the symbol combination is displayed. (The number of medals to be paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the pay line matches the symbol combination (combination) specified in the symbol combination table. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that a winning is achieved, a bonus such as payout of a medal, operation of a re-game, or operation of a bonus game is given to the player. If the combination of the symbols displayed along the winning line does not match any of the combinations of the symbols defined in the symbol combination table, the result is a so-called “losing”. That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the combination of the symbols of “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an item of “out” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “out”.

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the pay line is defined. Specifically, in the data field, a “storage area (data for specifying a display combination storage area (see FIG. 50) described later)” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored, and The "data (data for designating a bit corresponding to a combination of symbols in one-byte data)" to be stored is defined. In the present embodiment, the combination of each symbol is determined by using 45 1-byte storage areas. For example, “R_RT transition point A_01” illustrated in FIG. 9 is determined by storing 1 in bit 0 of the display combination storage area 1.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the pay line when each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, a combination name is defined according to the role of the combination and the type of the symbol constituting the combination.

  The payout number specified in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 19, when the combination “C_CD bell” is displayed, ten medals will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, combinations of a large number of symbols shown in FIGS. 9 to 21 are classified into a plurality of types according to their roles. The role type field in the symbol combination table defines the role of each symbol combination. More specifically, in this embodiment, a large number of symbol combinations are classified into six types of “RT transition eye”, “BB”, “JACIN”, “re-game”, “RT transition re-game”, and “winning”.

  The role type “RT transition point” is a combination of symbols in which the RT game state transitions when displayed, and corresponds to “R_RT transition point A_01” to “R_RT transition point F_08” shown in FIG. 9. . These "RT transition eyes" are combinations of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order bell, and are the above-mentioned "bell spilling eyes". That is, if the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, there is a possibility that any of the symbol combinations corresponding to the combination type “RT transition” is displayed. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “RT transition eye” is displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state.

  The role type “BB” is a combination of symbols in which the BB is activated when displayed, and corresponds to “C_BB1” to “C_BB5_02” shown in FIG. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “BB” is displayed, the operation of the BB starts and the game shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

  The role type "JACIN" is a symbol combination (combination) in which the RB is activated when displayed, and corresponds to "C_JACIN1" to "C_JACIN3" shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “JACIN” is displayed, the operation of the RB starts, and after the operation of the RB is completed, the state shifts to the RT2 game state.

  The role type “re-game” is a symbol combination (combination) in which the re-game operation is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CU white” to “C_KY lip_09” shown in FIG. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “re-game” is displayed, the re-game is performed. Note that when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “re-game” is displayed, the RT game state is not shifted.

  The role type “RT shift replay” is a combination (combination) of symbols that, when displayed, may cause the RT game status to shift together with the replay operation. The “C_CU lip” shown in FIGS. — 01 ”to“ C_Sui FKF — 18 ”. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “RT shift replay” is displayed, the replay operation is performed, and there is a possibility that the game may shift to various RT gaming states according to the combination of symbols.

  For example, when “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” shown in FIG. 11 are displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state. These “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” are combinations of symbols that are likely to be displayed when there is an incorrect answer in the push order determined for each type of push order rip, and are described in “RT1 Migration lip ". That is, if the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect, any one of “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” will be displayed.

  Further, when “C_C Lip 01” to “C_Bell FKC_12” shown in FIGS. 11 to 13 are displayed, there is a possibility that the game mode shifts to the RT4 gaming state. These “C_C lip 01” to “C_bell FKC_12” are the above-mentioned “RT4 transition lip”. More specifically, the above-described pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the pressing order is correct, any one of “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” is displayed. When the above-mentioned “F_Chance Lip 2” or “F_Slip Chance Lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, any one of “C_C Lip 01” to “C_Bell FKC_12” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. Will be.

  In addition, when “C_CD Chelip A_01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are displayed, there is a possibility that the game shifts to the RT3 gaming state. These “C_CD Chelip A_01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” are the aforementioned “RT3 transition lip”. More specifically, when the above-mentioned “F_slip chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, one of “C_CD chelip A_01” to “C_sui FKF_18” regardless of the pressing order. Will be displayed.

  The role type “winning” is a combination of symbols in which medals are paid out when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CD watermelon” to “C_B bell BB_04” shown in FIGS. 18 to 21. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "winning" is displayed, the number of medals specified in the number-of-payouts column of the symbol combination table is paid out. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “winning” is displayed, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  "C_CD bell" shown in FIG. 19 is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct in the pressing order determined for each type of the above-described pressing order bell. In addition, among the combinations of symbols corresponding to the role type "winning", the combination of symbols of the payout number "3" is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order bell described above. This is a possible combination of symbols. That is, when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order bell, the combination of the symbols of the number of payouts “3” out of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the role type “winning” or the role type “RT shift” The combination of the symbols corresponding to the "eyes" will be displayed. In the case of the pachislot 1, there are six possible pushing orders for the stop operation. Therefore, a symbol combination to be displayed when the answer is incorrect is set arbitrarily from the five pushing orders of the incorrect answer. be able to.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines information of a lottery value for a data pointer corresponding to a winning combination. In the above-described bonus non-winning state of the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the “RT0” column of the internal lottery table, and similarly, the bonus non-winning state of the RT1 gaming state to the bonus non-winning state. In the winning state of the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery values defined in the “RT1” to “RT4” columns of the internal lottery table. In the RT5 gaming state between flags, the internal winning combination is determined using a lottery value specified in the “RT5” column of the internal lottery table. In the bonus state RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the “BB (RT0)” column of the internal lottery table, and similarly, the bonus state RT4 gaming state or the bonus state. In the RT2 gaming state of the state, the internal winning combination is determined using a lottery value specified in the “BB (RT4)” or “BB (RT2)” column of the internal lottery table, and the RB gaming state of the bonus state In the internal lottery table, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the “BB (RB)” column of the internal lottery table.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of the RT gaming state, and the presence or absence of the bonus (BB or RB) is determined. Therefore, the type of winning combination (other than replay and carryover combination) determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change.

  The data pointer is data obtained as a result of the lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data. As the data pointer, a small combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of a plurality of winning numbers.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each winning combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative The internal lottery is performed by making a determination (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the value specified as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which the value is assigned is determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

<Comparison table of internal winning combinations and symbol combinations>
FIG. 27 to FIG. 45 are comparison tables showing the correspondence between the combinations (combinations) of symbols that can be displayed on the winning line in each internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on a winning line in a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that in the winning combination, combinations of symbols that cannot be displayed on the winning line are not shown in the correspondence table (for example, in the winning combination “F_black-black-black” shown in FIG. Since the combination of the symbols shown in (1) cannot be displayed, the illustration of the correspondence table is omitted).

  Referring to FIG. 27, for example, when the winning combination “F_black-black-black” is an internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination name “C_BB1” can be stopped and displayed on the winning line. Referring to FIG. 10, the combination name “C_BB1” is a combination of symbols in which “BAR-BAR-BAR” is displayed along the pay line. The case where the winning combination is “losing” is not defined in the correspondence table shown in FIG. 23, but this is the case of all combinations of symbols defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that the display of is not allowed.

  In the pachi-slot 1, the main control circuit 41 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 41 determines whether the predetermined winning combination is the internal winning combination. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 27 to 45, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed. Since the control is different not only according to the internal winning combination but also according to the current gaming state, a combination of symbols with circles corresponding to the winning combination may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

<Overview of winning combinations>
This point will be described in detail with reference to the outline of the winning combination shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. As shown in FIG. 46, when “losing” is determined as the internal winning combination, display of all symbol combinations specified by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 21 is not permitted. Note that, in the RT4 gaming state in which the probability of determining the replay-related hand as the internal winning combination is high, the probability that “losing” is determined as the internal winning hand decreases as the winning probability of the replay-related hand increases. Therefore, in the following, "losing" in the RT4 gaming state may be used as a rare combination (handled as "so-called pure missing").

  If any of “F_black-black-black”, “F_red-red-red”, “F_white-white-white”, “F_red-red-white”, and “F_white-white-red” is determined as the internal winning combination, Display of a combination of symbols having a relationship is permitted. If any of “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, and “F_white / white / red” is determined as the internal winning combination, as described above, The gaming state is an inter-flag state of RT5 gaming.

  In addition, when any one of “F_maintenance lip 1” and “F_maintenance lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 28 to 32 is permitted. In addition, even if the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed for “F_maintenance lip 1” and “F_maintenance lip 2”, the RT game state is not shifted.

  Further, “F_123 lip” to “F_2nd lip” are the above-described pressing order lip. When any of these pressing order rips is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of the possessed symbols is permitted. More specifically, when the answer is correct in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order lip, the RT4 shift lip (FIGS. 11 to 11) of the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. Display of the symbol combination according to FIG. 13) is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the order of the pressing, the RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 11) of the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. ) Is allowed to be displayed.

  The name of the winning combination as the pressing order lip is determined based on the correct pressing order. For example, “1” named “F_123 Lip” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “right”. ". Then, “123” indicates the correct pushing order. In the case of “F_123 Lip”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “medium”, and the third stop operation is “right”. Indicates that the answer is correct, and other push orders result in an incorrect answer. Similarly, in the case of “F_231 Lip”, the answer is correct when the first stop operation is “middle”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, and in the other pressing order. Is incorrect. “F_2nd lip” indicates that the answer is correct when the first stop operation is “middle”, and that the answer is incorrect when the pressing order is other than that.

  Returning to FIG. 46, “F_123 Upper 7 Tens” to “F_2nd Cross 7 Alignment” are winning combinations with different stop controls depending on the gaming state as well as the internal winning combinations. More specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_123 upper 7-ten” to “F_2nd 7 crosses” are the above-described pushing order lip. When the pushing order is correct, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of the symbols according to the above-described RT4 shift lip (see FIGS. 11 to 13) among the combinations of the symbols having the symbol is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the correspondence shown in FIGS. 28 to 32 is changed. Display of the symbol combination corresponding to the above-described RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 11) among the symbol combinations possessed is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_123 upper 7 ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 assortment” are “F_123 upper 7 ten” of the combinations of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white — 02” shown in FIG. "To" F_2nd cross 7 alignment "are permitted to be displayed. Here, the combination of the symbols of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white — 02” is a pseudo line other than the winning line among the lines connecting the upper, middle, and lower stages of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in a straight line. This is a combination of symbols in which three or two "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed on the line. In the following, a combination of symbols in which either the "white 7" symbol or the "red 7" symbol is displayed may be referred to as a "seven lip", and the "white 7" symbol or the "red 7" symbol. A combination of symbols in which any two of the symbols are displayed may be referred to as a “7-flip”. Among the combination names “C_CU White” to “C_B White — 02”, the combination of the symbols without “FK (fake)” in the combination name is “7-set lip”, and the combination name is “FK (fake)”. The combination of the symbols with "7" is "Rip 7". Lines connecting the upper, middle, and lower sections of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in a straight line are a top line connecting the upper sections, a center line connecting the middle sections, a bottom line connecting the lower sections, a cross-down line connecting the lower right, and There are five types of cross-up lines that connect to the upper right, but the winning line is a cross-down line, so “7 Aligned Lips” or “7-Fan Lips” are four pseudo lines other than the cross-down line. Along with either one of the three “white 7” or “red 7” symbols.

  Referring to the correspondence shown in FIG. 28, in the bonus state, the display of “7-fold lip” is permitted for “F_123 upper 7-ten” and “F_132 lower 7-ten”. Also, in the bonus state, the display of “7 sets of lip” is permitted for “F_312 upper 7 sets” to “F_2nd cross 7 sets”.

  Further, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip”, and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are not only internal wins, but also wins with different stop controls depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are the above-described RT4 shift lip regardless of the pressing order (see FIGS. 11 to 13). ) Is allowed to be displayed. Note that, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 gaming state. , "F_J1 upper 7 lip", "F_J1 lower 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are determined as internal winning combinations, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” has different stop control depending on the type of the JACIN role carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, one of “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_JACIN1” ) Are determined as internal winning combinations), “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are “7 matching rips” other than the cross down line. Along either of the four pseudo lines, three "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" is determined as an internal winning combination), "F_J1 upper 7 lip", "F_J1 lower 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are "normal during bonus". And a combination of symbols other than "7-set lip" among the combinations of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 28 to 32.

  The state in which “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC1 flags”. Similarly, the state in which “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination is referred to as “between JAC2 flags”. A state in which “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC3 flags”.

  “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the game state as well as the internal winning combinations. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols corresponding to the above-described RT4 shift lip (see FIGS. 11 to 13) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. Note that, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 gaming state. When “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” differs depending on the type of the hand related to JACIN carried over as the internal winning hand. Specifically, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_JACIN2” "Is determined as the internal winning combination)," F_J2 Chance Lip 1 "to" F_J2 Cherry Lip "are" Chance Lip ", and the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. Display of any combination of the symbols “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” among the combinations is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, one of “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” and one of “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3”) In the case where the two are determined as internal winning combinations), “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are “normal lip during bonus” and have the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 33 to 39. The symbol combinations other than "chance lip" among the symbol combinations are displayed.

  Further, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the gaming state as well as the internal winning combinations. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols corresponding to the above-described RT4 shift lip (see FIGS. 11 to 13) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, since “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 gaming state, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 chance lip 1” to When “F_J3 cherry lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are “chance lip” regardless of the type of the hand related to JACIN carried over as the internal winning hand, and are shown in FIGS. 33 to 39. Display of any of the symbol combinations “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” among the symbol combinations having a correspondence relationship is permitted.

  When any one of “F_chance lip 1” to “F_common bell” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 33 to 45 is permitted. The features such as the transition of the RT gaming state triggered by “F_Chance Lip 1” to “F_Common Bell” are as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 47, “F_123 Bell A” to “F_321 Bell D” are basically the above-mentioned pressing order bells, and one of these pressing order bells is determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the display of a combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 40 to 45 is permitted. More specifically, when the push order determined for each type of the push order bell is correct, the "C_CD bell (see FIG. 19)" of the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of the symbols according to is permitted. On the other hand, when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell, the symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned bell spilling eye (see FIG. 9) among the combinations of the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. Or the combination of the symbols whose payout number is “3” in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 19 to 21) is permitted.

  The name of the winning combination as the pressing order bell is determined based on the correct pressing order. For example, “1” named “F_123 Bell A” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”. Right ". Then, “123” indicates the correct push order. In the case of “F_123 Bell A”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “medium”, and the third stop operation is “right”. ”Indicates that the answer is correct, and other pressing orders indicate an incorrect answer. Similarly, in the case of “F_231 Bell A”, when the first stop operation is “medium”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, the answer is correct. In this case, it is incorrect.

  In addition, among the bells in the pushing order, “F_123 bell C”, “F_123 bell D”, “F_132 bell C”, “F_132 bell D”, “F_213 bell C”, “F_213 bell D”, “F_231 bell C”, “F_231 bell D”, “F_312 bell” C, “F_312 Bell D”, “F_321 Bell C”, and “F_321 Bell D” are winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the gaming state as well as the internal winning combinations. More specifically, during the non-flag period (the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state), the above-mentioned pressing order bell is used, and when the answer is correct in the pressing order, the symbols have the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. The display of the symbol combination corresponding to “C_CD bell (see FIG. 19)” is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 40 to 45 is selected. The display of the combination of the symbols according to the above-mentioned bell spilled eyes (see FIG. 9) or the combination of the symbols whose payout number is “3” in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 19 to 21) is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the flag-to-flag state (RT5 gaming state of the flag-to-flag state), “F_123 Bell C”, “F_123 Bell D”, “F_132 Bell C”, “F_132 Bell D”, “F_213 Bell C”, “F_213 Bell D”, “F_231 Bell” C, "F_231 bell D", "F_312 bell C", "F_312 bell D", "F_321 bell C", and "F_321 bell D" are combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. Display of a combination of symbols according to the “C_CD bell” (see FIG. 19) is permitted.

  When any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIG. 27 is permitted. When any one of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” determined as the internal winning combinations have the corresponding symbol combinations. Until it is displayed (only during the bonus state), it is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, when one of “F_RB combination A” and “F_RB combination B” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 40 to 45 is permitted.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
48 to 54 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 53.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 48 is configured by 45 storing areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of each of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. In the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45, data determined based on the internal winning combination (data indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the internal winning combination) is stored. In the illustrated internal winning combination storing area, for example, bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 corresponds to “C_BB1” indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped when the internal winning combination is “F_black-black-black”. .

<Storage area for carryover role>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 49 is a storage area of 2 bytes in size, which is composed of two storage areas, carryover combination storage areas 1 and 2. In the carryover combination storage area, data relating to the carryover combination is stored.

  For example, by storing “1” in bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1, it is possible to determine that the combination name “C_BB1” has been won as “F_black-black-black” that can be stopped. The state in which “1” is stored in bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1 is held until the symbol combination corresponding to the combination name “C_BB1” is displayed on the winning line.

  That is, when “F_black-black-black” is won, the bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1 is set to “2” in at least one unit game until the combination of these bonus symbols is displayed on the payline as a display combination. The state where "1" is stored is maintained. Maintaining the state where “1” is stored in the bit 2 from the unit game in which the bonus is won to the winning unit game is called so-called “carryover”. Also, “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, “F_white / white / red”, “F_JACIN1” corresponding to the data (combination of symbols) stored in the carryover combination storage area “F_JACIN2” and “F_JACIN3” are referred to as “carried over role”.

  When a stop operation is performed by the player and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, the internal winning combination storage area is initialized, but the carryover combination storage area is not initialized. By doing so, the state of “carryover” can be maintained.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 50 is configured by 45 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 45. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the entire size of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. The display combination storage areas 1 to 45 store data determined based on data (storage area type) defined by each symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 9 to 21. The value of the display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 51 to identify the display combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storage area, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the display combination storage area 1 correspond to “R_RT transition A_01” to “R_RT transition C_01”, respectively.

<Gaming state flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 51 stores a flag for identifying a game state managed by the main control circuit 41, and has a size of 1 byte.

  Bits 0 to 6 of the gaming state flag storage area are respectively set to “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state”, “RT4 gaming state”, “RT5 gaming state”, “BB gaming state”, and “RB gaming state”. Yes, it is.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 52 is 1 byte in size. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R capable of detecting a stop operation by the player, that is, valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R was detected immediately before. In the present embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are not used and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is operated by the player, "1" is stored in the bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is valid, “1” is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, that the stop button is valid means that a stop operation can be detected. The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed and capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 53 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. This pressing order storage area is 1 byte in size, uses bits 0 to 5, uses bits 6 and 7, and stores “0”.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, if the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (ON) in bit 1, and if the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit 2 Is stored (ON), "1" is stored in bit 3 in the case of "middle → right → left", and "1" is stored in bit 4 in the case of "right → left → middle" (ON), and “1” is stored (ON) in bit 5 in the case of “right → middle → left”.

<Symbol code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 54 has the same configuration as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  The symbol code storage area stores data indicating a combination of symbols that may be displayed on the rotating reel. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all combinations of symbols may be displayed. Therefore, “1” is stored in all corresponding bits of the symbol code storage area. You. Thereafter, when the left reel 3L stops (the reels 3C and 3R rotate), the bit corresponding to the symbol combination that cannot be displayed due to the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to “0”.

[Transition flow of sub-side gaming state]
Next, a game state controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) of the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment and its transition flow will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 manages the game state based on whether or not to notify the details of the stop operation advantageous to the player. As shown in FIG. 55, the sub control circuit 42 distinguishes between a normal gaming state, an ART gaming state, and a bonus state. Here, the general gaming state is a gaming state that is basically disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is a gaming state that is basically advantageous to the player, and the ART gaming state is a gaming state. Is the most advantageous game state for the player. In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays a game so as to shift from the general gaming state (while sandwiching the bonus state according to the situation) to the most advantageous ART gaming state.

  The general gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main non-bonus winning state RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6) and a sub-side ART random determination gaming state. As shown in FIG. 55, the general gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, and a CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state, and the CZ are gaming states having different transition probabilities to the ART gaming state, and the normal gaming state has the lowest transition probability to the ART gaming state. The game state has a higher transition probability to the ART game state than the normal game state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main bonus non-winning state RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6), and a non-winning gaming state in the sub-side ART random determination. As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility that the normal game state may shift to the ART game state, the CZ, the high-probability game state, and the bonus state.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, a lottery (A) for transition to ART and CZ is performed, and in this transition lottery, when the transition to (A1) ART is won, the sub control circuit 42 sets the normal gaming state. From the game state to the ART game state. Also, in this transfer lottery, when the transfer to (A2) CZ is won, the sub-control circuit 42 transfers the game state from the normal game state to CZ. Although the details of the shift lottery (A) during the normal game state will be described later, in the normal game state, the shift to the ART and the CZ is performed twice at the start of reel rotation and the stop of the reel during one game. The lottery (A) is performed.

  In the normal gaming state, a lottery (B) for shifting to the high-probability gaming state is also performed. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the main gaming state is controlled to shift to the bonus non-winning state of the RT4 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state of the RT4 gaming state is shifted to the high probability gaming state by lottery (B). Is performed. When this transition lottery (B) is won, the sub control circuit 42 transitions the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. The details of the shift lottery (B) during the normal gaming state will be described later. In this shift lottery, the role related to the replay in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, which is the sub-side normal gaming state, is set as the internal winning combination. The transfer lottery (B) is performed based on the determined number of times.

  In the normal gaming state, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carried BB is displayed, and when the BB is activated, the sub-control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the bonus state. Note that the shift to the bonus state is common to the main side and the sub side, and therefore detailed description is omitted below.

  Subsequently, CZ is a game state corresponding to the main non-bonus winning state RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6), and a sub-side ART random drawing non-winning gaming state. CZ is a game state (chance zone) having a high probability of transition to the ART game state, and continues for a maximum of 30 games. The CZ is a so-called perfect-run chance zone, and when the CZ has continued for a maximum of 30 games, the ART transition is determined. On the other hand, during the CZ, a lottery transition to the ART is performed, and when the transition lottery is “maintained”, the CZ ends. Here, even if the transition lottery is “maintained”, the transition to ART is performed if the transition lottery has been won, but more advantageous if CZ continues for 30 games. Since there is a possibility of transition to the ART gaming state, during the CZ, basically, the game is performed without receiving the transition lottery, and when the transition lottery is performed, the transition lottery is set to “invalid”. By playing the game in such a manner, it is desired to continue the 30 games without ending the CZ. The “maintenance / invalidation” of the shift lottery during CZ will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility that a transition from the CZ to a normal gaming state, an ART gaming state, and a bonus state. Specifically, when (C1) is won in the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed during the CZ, the sub-control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the CZ to the ART game state, and in this transfer lottery, C2) When no winning is achieved, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequently, the high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main non-bonus winning state RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6), and a sub-side ART random determination non-winning gaming state, and The transition to the high-probability gaming state during the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the lottery (B) is won. As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility that a transition from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state.

  More specifically, in the high-probability gaming state, a lottery transition to the ART (D) is performed. In this transition lottery, when the transition to the (D1) ART is won, the sub control circuit 42 sets the high-probability gaming state. From the game state to the ART game state. Although the details of the shift lottery (D) during the high-probability game state will be described later, basically, similarly to the shift lottery (A) during the normal game state, when the reel rotation starts during one game and when the reel At the two timings at the time of stopping, the lottery (D) for shifting to the ART is performed. The transition lottery (D) during the high-probability gaming state has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART than the transition lottery (A) during the normal gaming state.

  The high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main-side bonus non-winning state of the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6). In the main-side control, the state transitions from the (E) RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. When such control is performed, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won).

  Here, as described above, the RT4 gaming state in the main non-bonus winning state on the main side is, for example, when the answer is correct in the pushing order lip in the RT0 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state on the main side (the normal gaming state on the sub side). It is a game state to shift. As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal game state, which is the most basic game state (= disadvantageous for the player), when the answer is correct to the pushing order lip, the game is shifted to the high-probability game state, and the operation proceeds to ART. The transition of the advantage. In other words, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state in which the bonus is not won due to the stop operation of the player, a penalty such as not performing the ART transfer lottery is given. Instead, it is in an advantageous state for the player. As a result, in the pachislot 1, the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus non-winning state in which the ART transfer lottery has not been won can be set as the transition chance section to the ART gaming state, and the bonus non-attached ART bonus is not provided. It is possible to enhance the interest in the winning state of the RT4 gaming state.

  Further, from the viewpoint of the player, if the player answers correctly in the order of pushing in the normal game state, the player may shift to the high-probability game state which is a transition chance section to the ART game state. Sexuality is increased, and the interest during the normal game state can be increased. That is, in the gaming property in which the gaming state which has accidentally shifted due to the player's stop operation is set as a penalty section, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed by the left reel so as not to receive a penalty). And so on). In this regard, as in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the lottery for shifting to the ART without imposing a penalty, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal game state, and can perform the normal game state. The operability can be improved as well as the middle game.

  By the way, if the game state that has accidentally shifted due to the stop operation is not a penalty section but a transition chance section to the ART game state, the profit on the player side and the profit on the amusement store side do not give excessive profit to the player. It is necessary to adjust the balance. There are many possible methods of adjusting the balance. For example, there is an adjustment method in which a transition chance lot to the ART gaming state is set, and it is easier to win the shift lottery compared to the normal gaming state. In the method, the meaning of the transition chance section is lost. In this regard, in the pachislot 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, an RT1 gaming state in which a fixed number of games are not in the bonus non-winning state without transition to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is provided. And By providing such an RT1 gaming state during the bonus non-winning state with the fixed number of games, the frequency of accidental transition due to the stop operation can be adjusted, and as a result, the profit of the player and the profit of the game store can be adjusted. The balance can be adjusted. As a result, the variables for adjusting the balance between both profits can be further diversified, and a gaming machine rich in gaming properties can be provided.

  Subsequently, the bonus state is a game state corresponding to one of the bonus states on the main side (see FIG. 6). As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility that a transition from the bonus state to a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and an ART gaming state. More specifically, when (F1) is won in the lottery (F) for shifting to ART performed during the bonus state, the sub-control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state after the BB operation ends. If (F2) is not won in this transition lottery, the sub-control circuit 42 transitions the gaming state from the bonus state to the normal gaming state after the operation of BB ends. Although the details of the shift lottery (F) during the bonus state will be described later, in the bonus state, when the above-described “7-set lip” symbol combination can be displayed, ART is won, and BB When a predetermined lottery performed at the end of the operation of the game is won, an ART is won.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying the contents of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, corresponds to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6) in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and the sub side on the sub side. This is a gaming state in which the ART lottery has been won. In the ART gaming state, for example, when the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning pressing order bell is displayed so that a combination of symbols having a large payout number (C_CD bell with a payout number of 10) is displayed. Notify the correct push order. Further, in the ART gaming state, for example, when the pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, a symbol combination that maintains the RT4 gaming state in which the role related to the replay is determined to be the internal winning combination with a high probability (for example, The winning push order lip is notified of the correct push order so that (RT4 shift lip) is displayed.

  Further, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the ally character and the enemy character battle (battle) during the ART game state, and the ART game state is continued when the ally character wins, and the ART is performed when the enemy character wins. End the gaming state. In order to provide such gaming properties, the ART gaming state is composed of an enemy-determining ART and a battle ART, as shown in FIG.

  The enemy-determining ART is an ART gaming state during a period in which the type of the enemy character fighting with the ally character is determined. As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility that a transition from the enemy-determined ART to the battle ART and the bonus state is made. Specifically, when an enemy character is determined in (G) enemy determination ART, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the enemy determination ART to the battle ART. The method of determining the enemy character during the enemy determination ART will be described later.

  The battle ART is an ART gaming state during a period in which the enemy character and the ally character determined in the enemy determination ART compete against each other. As shown in FIG. 55, there is a possibility that a transition from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, the normal game state (normal game state), and the bonus state. Specifically, in the battle (H) during the battle ART, when the (H1) ally character wins, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the game state from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, and (H2) the enemy character wins Then, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from the battle ART to the general gaming state. The method of determining the outcome of the battle (H) during the battle ART will be described later.

[Correspondence between main side / sub side of winning combination]
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 41) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub-control circuit 42) side. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. It should be noted that “missing” may be “pure missing” only during the RT4 gaming state. Further, the correspondence between the main side and the sub side of the winning combination can be made different depending on the gaming state. In this regard, the correspondence shown in FIG. 56 shows a correspondence in a gaming state other than the bonus state, and the correspondence in the bonus state is shown in FIG.

[Overview of effects performed on liquid crystal display device 10]
FIG. 57 shows an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 10. In FIG. 57, the liquid crystal display device 10 is divided into three regions, a first display region 101, a second display region 102, and a display window 4, for the sake of simplicity. Are formed in an integrated manner.

  The first display area 101 is an area where a main effect is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 57, a display example during the battle ART is shown. During the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 57, an ally character and an enemy character compete against each other, and an effect of winning or losing is performed by reducing each physical strength (HP) by each attack / defense. . The display window 4 is as described above, and displays a part of the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  In the second display area 102, an apocalypse 103 that affects various types of lottery performed on the sub (sub-control circuit 42) side is displayed. The apocalypse 103 includes five areas 103A, 103B, 103C, 103D, and 103E for setting a later-described effect ball. In the area 103A, effect balls that affect various lotteries in the current game are set, in the area 103B, effect balls that affect various lotteries in the next game are set, and in the area 103C, two game destinations are set. The effect ball which influences various lotteries in a game is set, the effect ball which affects various lotteries in a game of three game destinations is set in an area 103D, and the various lotteries in a game of four game destinations are set in an area 103E. The effect ball which influences is set. In other words, in Apocalypse 103, effect balls that affect various lotteries in five games including the current game are set. The effect ball set in the apocalypse 103 is updated in the set area in accordance with the progress of the game. When the apocalypse 103 is activated, a certain effect ball (including a blank (empty)) is set, and when not operating, the effect ball is not set.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the apocalypse 103 may or may not operate, and operates by winning an operation lottery described later. When the apocalypse 103 operates in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, as shown in FIG. 57, any one of the lottery ball 1, the lottery ball 2, the lottery ball 3, the lottery ball 4, and the confirmed ball is displayed in the areas 103A to 103E. Is set. Lottery balls 1 to fixed balls set in the apocalypse 103 in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state have an effect on the above-described transitional lottery (A) (D). More specifically, the lottery balls 1 to fixed balls set in the area 103A affect the above-described transition lottery (A) (D) in the current game.

  Note that the above-mentioned transition lotteries (A) and (D) are performed at two timings, ie, at the start of reel rotation and during the stop of the reel during one game. Of these, with respect to the shift lottery (A) and (D) performed at the start of the reel rotation (at the start), the lottery balls 1 to the set balls set in the area 103A are determined as the lottery results regardless of the internal winning combination. Affect it. On the other hand, for the shift lotteries (A) and (D) performed when the reels are stopped, the lottery balls 1 to fixed balls set in the area 103A have the symbol combination displayed when the reels are stopped when the combination of the symbols is “Bell Win” or more. Only in certain cases, it affects the lottery result. In addition, "bell prize" means that a combination of symbols at the time of the correct answer in the push order bell is displayed, or a combination of symbols according to the common bell is displayed. Is displayed as a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the rare roles such as "bell winning" or chanlip, strong cherry, weak cherry, fixed role, watermelon, and pure loss (see FIG. 56). It is.

  The lottery ball 1 to the confirmed ball have different effects on the shift lottery (A) and (D). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the lottery ball 1 has a low probability of winning above CZ (CZ or ART), the lottery ball 2 has a medium probability of winning above CZ, and the lottery ball 3 has The winning probability of CZ or higher is a high probability, and the lottery ball 4 is determined to have a winning of CZ or higher, and the determined ball is determined to be the ART winning.

  Subsequently, in the CZ, the apocalypse 103 always operates. In the CZ, as shown in FIG. 57, any of the developed balls or the avoidance balls is set in the areas 103A to 103E of the apocalypse 103, or a blank (empty) state is set in which no effect ball is set. The development ball and the avoidance ball set in the apocalypse 103 in the CZ affect the above-described ART transition lottery (C) performed during the CZ. More specifically, the development ball and the avoidance ball set in the area 103A have an effect on the above-described ART transition lottery (C) in the current game.

  More specifically, if the development order is set in the area 103A and the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the above-described ART transition lottery (C) is performed. If a stop operation is performed in this game, and if the stop operation is a correct stop operation in the pressing order determined for the winning pressing order bell, the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) Becomes "invalid". On the other hand, when the stop operation is an operation of stopping the incorrect answer in the pressing order determined for the winning pressing order bell, the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) is “maintained”. As described above, the CZ is a complete-run type CZ, and the CZ ends when the transfer lottery (C) performed at a stage before the complete run is “maintained”. Therefore, in the game in which the development ball is set in the area 103A, the player desires that the pressing order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination (the transfer lottery (C) itself is not performed). When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination, it is desired that the correct answer is made in the order of pressing (the shift lottery (C) becomes invalid).

  On the other hand, the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are effect balls that do not perform the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART even if the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. From the viewpoint of the player, in a game in which the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are set, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Subsequently, in the enemy determination ART, the apocalypse 103 always operates. In the enemy-determining ART, in the areas 103A to 103E of the apocalypse 103, as shown in FIG. The boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 and the ally ball set in the apocalypse 103 in the enemy determination ART influence the lottery of the enemy determination performed during the enemy determination ART. More specifically, the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 and the ally ball set in the area 103 </ b> A influence the random determination of the enemy in the current game.

  Specifically, when any one of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 is set in the area 103A and the pressing order bell (which may include a common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, the setting is performed. The boss according to the type of the boss ball being set is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. The bosses corresponding to the boss balls 1 to 8 are enemy characters having different characteristics, respectively, and will be described later in detail. On the other hand, when any one of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 is set in the area 103A and an order other than the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the enemy character of the opponent is not determined and the enemy determination is performed. ART will continue. Further, when any one of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 is set in the area 103A, any one of a net loss, a watermelon, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a chanlip (a so-called rare role) is determined as an internal winning combination. Then, the opponent is not determined and the stock lottery of the ally ball is performed. In the situation where this stock lottery has been won and allied balls are stocked, the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse are rewritten as allied balls.

  Further, when an ally ball is set in the area 103A during the enemy determination ART, a lottery for increasing the physical strength (HP) of the ally character based on the internal winning combination is performed. If this lottery is won, the physical strength of the ally character increases, and the degree of expectation of the ally character winning in the subsequent battle ART increases.

  Subsequently, in the battle ART, the apocalypse 103 always operates. In the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 57, an effect ball of any one of an ally ball, an enemy ball, and an awakening ball is set in the regions 103A to 103E of the apocalypse 103. The friendly ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the apocalypse 103 in the battle ART affect the result of the battle performed during the battle ART. More specifically, the ally ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the area 103A have an effect on the battle in the current or subsequent game.

  Specifically, when a friendly ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 103A, and the pressing order bell or the common bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the character corresponding to the type of the effect ball set is set. Attack the opponent in the game. For example, when an ally ball is set, the ally character attacks the enemy character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character decreases. On the other hand, when the enemy ball is set, the enemy character attacks the ally character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the ally character decreases.

  On the other hand, in the case where a friendly ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 103A, if any of the net loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanlip (so-called rare role) is determined as the internal winning combination, Regardless of the type of the effect ball set, the ally character attacks the enemy character. In this case, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character is basically reduced more than when the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Also, in the case where the awakening ball is set in the area 103A, if any of the push order bell, common bell, pure loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanlip is determined as the internal winning combination, the ally character is determined. Attack against the enemy character and stock allied balls. Then, when the friend ball is stocked, the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is rewritten to the friend ball by the amount of stock. As a result, the number of situations in which the ally character launches an attack increases, and as a result, the degree of expectation of the ally character winning in the battle ART increases.

[ART and CZ random determination in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72, details of the transfer random determination (A) and (D) to ART and CZ performed during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram of the shift lottery (A) (D) performed during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, and FIGS. 59 to 72 are referred to during the shift lottery (A) (D). These are various data tables. The various data tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 72 are stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Overview of transfer lottery (A) (D)>
Referring to FIG. 58, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of main control circuit 41. . In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, first, the ART and CZ transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed. In the shift lottery (A) (D) at the start, the winning probability of ART or CZ basically differs according to the gaming state, and the ART or CZ winning in the high-probability gaming state is higher than in the normal gaming state. High probability. Note that, in the shift lottery (A) and (D) at the start, as described later, not only the gaming state but also the internal winning combination and the effect balls (lottery balls 1 to fixed balls) set in the area 103A. Or, the winning probability of CZ is different.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, the apocalypse lottery is performed as to whether or not to activate the apocalypse. In this apocalypse lottery, the winning probability differs depending on the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Specifically, the winning modes of the apocalypse operation include a low mode, a high mode, and a concentrated mode (there are also states of short, middle, and long, respectively). In the mode and the high mode, the act of apocalypse is not won. In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the apocalypse is activated when the status can be upgraded to the concentrated mode.

  After that, when a stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, ART and CZ transition lottery (A) (D) at the time of reel stoppage is performed according to the presence or absence of the operation of the apocalypse. More specifically, when the apocalypse is activated, based on the combination of the effect ball (lottery ball 1 to the confirmed ball) set in the area 103A and the symbol “Bell Win” or more, the ART and CZ are entered. (A) and (D). In the transfer lottery (A) and (D) when the reels are stopped, the winning probability of ART or CZ differs depending on the effect ball set in the area 103A.

<Various Data Tables Referenced in Transition Lottery (A) (D)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 59 to FIG. 72, the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to ART and CZ performed during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be specifically described.

<ART lottery table at start>
FIG. 59 to FIG. 61 are diagrams showing a start ART random determination table referred to in the start random determination (A) and (D) during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. The start-time ART lottery table defines information on a lottery value with respect to a lottery result for each of the current gaming state, the effect ball set in the area 103A, and the internal winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, on the sub (sub-control circuit 42) side, the effect random number value extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 32767” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value according to each lottery result. The lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

  Referring to the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, during the normal gaming state, the probability of winning CZ or ART differs depending on the effect ball set in the area 103A. It can be seen that the probability of winning the CZ or ART differs accordingly. Also, comparing the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 59 to 60 and the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 61, it is possible to win the ART with a higher probability in the high-probability game state than in the normal game state. I understand. Similarly, referring to the ART lottery table at the start shown in FIG. 61, it can be seen that in the high-probability gaming state, although the CZ is not won, the probability of winning the ART is high.

<Mode shift lottery table>
FIG. 62 to FIG. 66 are mode transition lottery tables referred to in transition lottery of the winning mode of the apocalypse operation in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. The mode shift lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating, the current win mode of the apocalypse operation, and information on the lottery value for the win mode of the transfer destination for each internal winning combination. Whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating is determined by the apocalypse flag. When the apocalypse flag is “0”, it means that the apocalypse is not operating. When the apocalypse flag is “1”, the apocalypse is operating. Means inside.

  As described above, the winning modes of the apocalypse operation include the low mode, the high mode, and the concentrated mode, and each mode has a state such as short, middle, and long. The low mode, the high mode, and the concentrated mode are winning modes in which the expected appointments of the apocalypse lottery for determining whether to activate the apocalypse are different as described above. The short, middle, and long states are states that determine whether to easily shift to a more advantageous winning mode or to shift to a more unfavorable winning mode. Specifically, a short is a state in which it is most difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode, and a state in which it is most likely to shift to a less advantageous winning mode, and a middle is less likely to shift to a more advantageous winning mode next. The state is a state where it is easy to shift to the less favorable winning mode next, and the long state is a state where it is most easy to shift to the more advantageous winning mode and a state where it is most difficult to shift to the more disadvantageous winning mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, when the apocalypse is not operating (apocalypse flag 0), the winning mode basically goes up in the order of the low mode, the high mode, and the concentration mode, and goes up once to the concentration mode. Does not go down to the low and high modes until the apocalypse is activated.

<Apocalypse operation lottery table>
FIG. 67 is an apocalypse operation lottery table referred to in the apocalypse lottery during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. The apocalypse operation lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse operation is currently in operation, the current winning mode of the apocalypse operation, and information on the lottery value relating to the operation of the apocalypse for each internal winning combination. Here, the operation of the apocalypse is performed over the guaranteed number of games to be added or subtracted as a result of the apocalypse lottery. Specifically, as a result of the apocalypse lottery, the number of guarantees is added by the number corresponding to the case where “Apocalypse is active_additional security 1 addition” to “apocalypse is active_additional security 5 addition”, and When "subtraction" is won, the guaranteed number of times is decremented by one. Then, when the number of guarantees becomes 0 as a result of the addition / subtraction, the operation of the apocalypse ends (the apocalypse flag changes from 1 to 0). If the guaranteed number is added by 1 or more when the apocalypse flag is 0, the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1 and the apocalypse is activated.

  Further, in the apocalypse operation lottery table, “no apocalypse operation” means that the apocalypse lottery is not won, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 0. Similarly, “keeping apocalypse in operation_maintained” means that the operation of the apocalypse is maintained without adding or subtracting the guaranteed number of times, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at “1”.

  Referring to the apocalypse operation lottery tables of FIGS. 67 (A) and (B), if the apocalypse is not currently operating, the operation of the apocalypse may start only when the winning mode is the concentrated mode. I understand. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, an effect indicating the current winning mode may be performed. For example, moving the movable role 22 can indicate the current winning mode. Specifically, the probability of moving the movable role 22 is changed according to the winning mode. For example, in a situation where the user is staying in the concentrated mode, the probability of moving the movable role 22 is increased, and the probability of moving the movable role 22 is changed to the high mode or the low mode. In a situation where the user is staying, a mode in which the probability of moving the movable accessory 22 is reduced may be considered. Similarly, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the apocalypse will be activated (the guaranteed number is added) in the apocalypse lottery may be performed. In particular, the production of the suggestion of the degree of expectation may be performed by a different thing from the movable role object 22.

<Apocalypse MAP lottery table>
FIG. 68 and FIG. 69 are apocalypse MAP lottery tables for lottery of the apocalypse MAP for determining the effect ball to be set in the operating apocalypse in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, basically, a MAP having a larger MAP number is more advantageous for a player. This applies not only to the apocalypse MAP but also to other MAPs described later. The apocalypse MAP lottery table in FIG. 68 is a table referred to when the apocalypse is activated (the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1). The apocalypse MAP lottery table in FIG. 69 is a table that is referred to when the MAP data defined for each apocalypse MAP is 0.

  The apocalypse MAP lottery table defines, for each current apocalypse MAP, information on a lottery value for the apocalypse MAP at the migration destination. It is assumed that “MAP0” is set as the apocalypse MAP at the initial stage when the power is turned on.

<MAP data correspondence table>
In the apocalypse MAP, MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the operating apocalypse is defined. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of MAP data defined in each apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 70, in the apocalypse MAP1, MAP data "1" is defined in the first game, and MAP data "0" is defined in the second game. When the MAP data “0” is defined, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG.

<Rotary lottery table at the time of Apocalypse operation>
FIG. 71 is an apocalypse operation effect ball lottery table for determining the effect ball to be set in the operating apocalypse in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. The effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation defines information on the lottery value of the effect ball set for each MAP data. As shown in FIG. 71, as the MAP data is larger, the effect ball which is more advantageous for the player is set. In FIG. 71, the determined ball is not randomly selected. In this regard, although the description is omitted, for example, by performing a lottery to upgrade the effect ball set at the time of winning the rare role, etc., it is possible to upgrade from the lottery ball 1 to the lottery ball 4 to a confirmed ball. Is also good.

  In FIG. 71, the information of the lottery value for the effect ball is also defined for the MAP data “0”. As described above, in the case of the MAP data “0”, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected. Here, any one of the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP and the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “0” may be given priority. In this regard, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery of the effect ball is never performed in the lottery apocalypse MAP, the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “0” is prioritized, and the lottery apocalypse is performed. If the lottery of the effect ball is performed even once in the MAP, the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP is given priority. For example, in the case of the apocalypse MAP "0", since all the MAP data for the five games are "0" (see FIG. 70), the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data "0" is performed once, and then a new one is performed. Lottery of Revelation MAP. On the other hand, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “1”, since the MAP data of the first game is “1” and the MAP data of the second game is “0” (see FIG. 70), the effect based on the MAP data “0” Without performing the lottery of the ball, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected after the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “1”.

  This applies to other MAPs described later. Specifically, the MAP data “0” performs a random determination based on the MAP data “0” only in the first game, and does not perform the random determination based on the MAP data “0” in the case of the second game. , A new MAP is randomly selected. When such control is performed, the lottery based on the MAP data “0” is not performed in the MAP having the MAP number “1” or more.

<Flow of the set of production balls to Apocalypse>
Here, the flow of setting the effect ball in the apocalypse will be specifically described. When the apocalypse lottery is won and the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, the apocalypse is activated. In accordance with the operation of the apocalypse, the sub control circuit 42 determines a predetermined number of effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, since the apocalypse has five areas for setting the effect ball, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 determines the five effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse. .

  When the apocalypse lottery is won and the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, the apocalypse MAP is randomly selected according to the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG. Here, it is assumed that the current apocalypse MAP is “3”. Referring to the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 68, for example, the apocalypse MAP "4" is randomly selected from the current apocalypse MAP "3". As shown in FIG. 70, the apocalypse MAP "4" defines "1" as the MAP data of the first game and "0" as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 42 randomly determines the first effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 71, “lottery ball 1” is determined as the first effect ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 42 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “4”. As shown in FIG. 70, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub control circuit 42 randomly selects a new apocalypse MAP without performing the random determination of the effect ball. Specifically, referring to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referred to at the time of the MAP data “0” shown in FIG. 69, the apocalypse MAP of the transfer destination is randomly selected from the current apocalypse MAP “4”. In the example shown in FIG. 69, the apocalypse MAP “5” is randomly selected as the apocalypse MAP of the transfer destination. In the apocalypse MAP "5", as shown in FIG. 70, "2" is defined as the MAP data of the first game, and "0" is defined as the MAP data of the second game. Thus, the sub control circuit 42 randomly selects the second effect ball based on the MAP data “2” of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 71, for example, “lottery ball 3” is determined as the second effect ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 42 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “5”. As shown in FIG. 70, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub control circuit 42 randomly selects a new apocalypse MAP without performing the random determination of the effect ball. Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referred to at the time of the MAP data “0” shown in FIG. 69, the apocalypse MAP of the transfer destination is randomly selected from the current apocalypse MAP “5”. With reference to FIG. 69, for example, the apocalypse MAP “1” is randomly selected as the migration apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 70, the apocalypse MAP "1" defines "1" as the MAP data of the first game and "0" as the MAP data of the second game. Thus, the sub control circuit 42 randomly selects a third effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 71, for example, “lottery ball 1” is determined as the third effect ball.

  In the same manner, when five effect balls are repeatedly determined, the sub-control circuit 42 ends the lottery of the effect balls and sequentially sets the determined effect balls in the apocalypse. The order in which the determined effect balls are set in the apocalypse is arbitrary. For example, the sub control circuit 42 sets the effect balls in the areas 103A, 103B, 103C, 103D, and 103E in order from the first effect ball. .

  Thereafter, when the game progresses to the next game, the effect balls set in the areas 103A to 103E slide one by one, and the area 103E becomes blank (empty). In this case, if the apocalypse flag is “1” in the game (if the number of guarantees remains), the effect ball is drawn again and a new effect ball is set in the area 103E. On the other hand, when the apocalypse flag is “0” in the game (when the guaranteed number of times remains as a result of the previous game, the operation of the apocalypse has already been completed, so that the lottery of the effect ball is not performed).

<ART lottery table at reel stop>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a reel stop ART lottery table referred to in the transition lottery (A) (D) when the reels are stopped in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. The reel stop-time ART lottery table defines information on a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result for each effect ball set in the area 103A. Here, as described above, in the transfer lottery (A) and (D) when the reel is stopped, the effect ball set in the area 103A is such that the combination of the symbols displayed when the reel is stopped is equal to or more than "bell winning". Only affects the lottery result. Therefore, the reel stoppage ART lottery table shown in FIG. 72 is a table that is referred to only when the effect ball is set in the area 103A and the combination of the symbols displayed when the reels are stopped is “bell win” or more. is there.

  Referring to the reel stoppage lottery table shown in FIG. 72, the probability of winning the CZ or ART differs depending on the effect ball set in the area 103A. In particular, in the lottery ball 4 and the confirmed ball, the CZ or ART is not determined. It can be understood that the winning is surely achieved.

[Game in high probability game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, a flow of a game other than the shift lottery (D) in the high-probability game state will be described. As described above, the high-probability gaming state corresponds to the main-side bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state. When the main side shifts from the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state to the bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state, The probability game state is also ended, and the game shifts to the normal game state. The transition from the non-bonus winning state RT4 gaming state to the bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state on the main side is, as described above, an incorrect answer to the pushing order bell or pushing order lip. Here, if the high-probability game state is immediately ended and the normal game state is entered even though the normal game state can be shifted to the high-probability game state, the interest is impaired. Therefore, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified to the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip only a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram of the flow of a game during the high-probability game state, and FIG. 74 is a data table referred to during the high-probability game state. The data table shown in FIG. 74 is stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Overview of game flow during high-probability game state>
Referring to FIG. 73, if a combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition lip is displayed during the non-winning of the ART transition lottery in the normal gaming state, the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state. At this point, the sub-side gaming state is the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). In this normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 41. In the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when an internal winning combination is determined, lottery of an avoidance point is performed based on the determined internal winning combination. When the avoidance point is obtained in the lottery, the sub control circuit 42 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state for the first time. The lottery transition (B) to the high-probability gaming state described above in FIG. 55 corresponds to the lottery of the avoidance point.

  In the high-probability gaming state, a situation in which the main side shifts to the non-bonus winning RT1 gaming state based on the acquired avoidance point is avoided. Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 41. The sub-control circuit 42 determines whether or not there is a possibility of shifting to the non-bonus winning state RT1 gaming state based on the internal winning combination. More specifically, when the internal winning combination is the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip, the sub-control circuit 42 determines that there is a possibility that the game may shift to the non-bonus winning RT1 gaming state.

  If there is a possibility of shifting to the bonus non-winning RT1 gaming state, the sub-control circuit 42 determines that the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip determined as the internal winning combination is correct only when the avoidance point remains. Notify the pressing order. By receiving this notification, the player can perform the stop operation in the correct pushing order, and the high-probability gaming state ends (that is, the state shifts to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won). ) Can be avoided. If there is no avoidance point, the player himself / herself selects the pushing order that gives the correct answer.

Thereafter, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the game state is shifted on the main side based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, when the bell spilled eye or the RT1 shift lip is displayed, the game shifts to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, and otherwise, the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won is maintained. . On the sub side, the sub control circuit 42 terminates the high-probability game state and starts the normal game state from the next game when the main game state shifts to the non-bonus winning RT1 game state. On the other hand, when the main-side gaming state maintains the RT4 gaming state where the bonus is not won, the high-probability gaming state is maintained, and the next game is also set to the high-probability gaming state.
The above flow is the flow of the game in the high-probability game state.

<Avoidance point lottery table>
FIG. 74 is an avoidance point lottery table referred to in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). The avoidance point lottery table defines the number of replays determined as an internal winning combination during the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state) and information on a lottery value for the avoidance point to be added for each internal winning combination in the current game. . As shown in FIG. 74, in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), different avoidance point lottery tables are referred to based on the number of times the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. In FIG. 74, the number of times the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is different between “0” and “one or more times”, but the number of times the table is different is not limited to this. .

  Referring to the avoidance point lottery table shown in FIG. 74, if the replay is determined as one or more internal winning combinations in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), the probability that an avoidance point will be given increases, and in particular, the replay time is one. In the replay determined as the internal winning combination after being determined as the internal winning combination at least twice, the avoidance point is easily given. Note that, as described above, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a high probability that the combination relating to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, if the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state) continues for several games, an avoidance point is given. Will be.

[Game in CZ]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a game in CZ, and FIGS. 76 to 81 are data tables referred to in CZ. The data tables shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 are stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Outline of the game flow during CZ>
As described above, in the transition lottery (A) (D) in the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, when the CZ is won, the gaming state transitions to the CZ. As shown in FIG. 75, in the first game after shifting to CZ, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation, the lottery of CZ_MAP is performed. CZ is a complete run type chance zone in which a maximum of 30 games are continued, and ends when the lottery (C) for shifting to ART that is performed on the way is “maintained”. In the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART performed in the middle of the CZ, the winning probability of the ART increases as the CZ continues. CZ_MAP is used to set the number of games in which the ART winning probability increases in the lottery (C) for shifting to ART performed in the middle of CZ.

  When the CZ_MAP is randomly selected in the first game after the CZ shift, the invalid point is randomly selected. The lottery of the invalid point includes a lottery of an initial value performed in the first game after shifting to the CZ, and an additional lottery performed in each game during the CZ. The invalidation point is information that determines the number of times the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed in the middle of the CZ is made “invalid”.

  Subsequently, a lottery of an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is performed. Thereafter, in games other than the 30th game of CZ, it is determined whether or not a developed ball is set in the current game, that is, whether or not a developed ball is set in the area 103A. If an advanced ball is set in this game, there is a possibility that a lottery (C) for shifting to ART in the middle of CZ may be performed. If an advanced ball is not set, basically The transfer lottery (C) is not performed. Specifically, when an advanced ball is set, the invalid point is 0, and the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, a lottery transition (C) to ART in the middle of CZ is performed. In the lottery during the CZ, the winning probability of the ART differs depending on the CZ mode, and when the CZ mode is 1 or more, the ART is always won. The above-described CZ_MAP is a MAP that sets the number of games in which the CZ mode goes from 0 to 1 (see FIG. 77).

  Here, when the development ball is set in the current game and the invalid point is 1 or more, or when the avoidance ball is set in the current game, an effect indicating the current CZ mode is performed. It may be. Specifically, since the number of games in which the CZ mode rises from 0 to 1 is set in CZ_MAP, the current CZ mode is 1 or the number of games remaining after the CZ mode changes from 0 to 1 Whether to go up can be specified from CZ_MAP. When the current CZ mode is 1, or when the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 in a few games (for example, two or three times), the sub control circuit 42 compares the CZ mode with the other cases. By performing an effect in a different mode, an effect indicating the current CZ mode can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the game of the 30th game of CZ, a lottery transition to ART (C) is performed. In this case, the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART based on the CZ mode 2 is always performed, and the ART is won assuming that the chance zone has been completed. Then, when the CZ is completed as described above, the state shifts to a more advantageous ART gaming state.

  During the CZ, when the lottery (C) for the transition to the ART accompanying the developed ball is performed at the start, the following processing is performed. Specifically, after that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, it is determined whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is equal to or more than "bell winning", that is, the answer is correct in the order in which the bells are pushed. It is determined whether or not it has been done. Then, if the answer is correct in the order in which the bells are pushed, the result of the lottery (C) shift to ART accompanying the development ball is invalidated regardless of whether or not the ART is won, and CZ continues. become. On the other hand, in the case where the answer is incorrect in the pushing order of the pushing order bell, the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) to the ART accompanying the development ball is maintained, and thereafter, the game state is shifted to the gaming state according to the lottery result.

  As described above, during CZ, as the CZ continues, the probability of winning the transfer lottery to the ART (C) increases, and in addition, when the CZ is completed, the transfer lottery to the ART (C) is always won, and Since the state is shifted to the advantageous ART game state, the longer the CZ is, the more advantageous the situation is for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game so that CZ continues. Here, since the termination condition of the CZ is that the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) to the ART is maintained, the player prevents the development ball from being set in the apocalypse, and the development ball in the apocalypse. In the game that is set, the pressing order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination.If the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball is set in the apocalypse, The game will be played in such a way that the answers are correct in the order in which they are pressed.

<CZ_MAP lottery table>
FIG. 76 is a CZ_MAP lottery table referred to in the first game after shifting to CZ. The CZ_MAP lottery table defines information on a lottery value for the type of CZ_MAP. When shifting to CZ, the sub-control circuit 42 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table and randomly selects CZ_MAP to be used in the CZ.

<CZ_MAP correspondence table>
FIG. 77 is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing the contents of CZ_MAP which is randomly determined by the CZ_MAP random determination table. In each of the CZ_MAPs, a CZ mode is set for each continuous game number in the CZ. The CZ mode is information for setting the ART winning probability in the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART during CZ as described above, and is set such that the greater the numerical value of the CZ mode, the higher the ART winning probability. ing. As shown in FIG. 77, each of the CZ_MAPs is set so that the CZ mode is raised each time the number of continuous games in the CZ is increased, and is not lowered once the CZ mode is raised. That is, each CZ_MAP is set so that the number of games going from CZ mode 0 to CZ mode 1 is different. Further, in all CZ_MAPs, when the number of continuous games is 30, the CZ mode is set to 2.

  In this embodiment, only three types of CZ modes, CZ modes 0, 1, and 2, are provided as the CZ mode. It is sufficient if the setting is made so that the mode does not decrease when the mode rises, and the types of the CZ mode are not limited to three types.

<Invalid point lottery table>
FIG. 78 is an invalid point lottery table. The invalid point lottery table randomly selects an invalid point that invalidates the transfer lottery (C) to ART performed when the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which a developed ball in CZ is set. Used for When the invalidation point is 1 or more, the lottery transition to ART (C) performed when the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the developed ball is set is invalidated. When the invalid point is 1 or more, the transfer lottery (C) may be performed once and then invalidated, or the transfer lottery (C) may not be performed at all.

  As described above, the lottery of the invalid point includes the lottery of the initial value performed in the first game after the shift to the CZ, and the additional lottery performed in each game during the CZ. FIG. 78 (A) is an invalid point lottery table used for initial value random determination, and defines information on a random determination value for an invalid point determined as an initial value. Further, (B) and (C) of FIG. 78 are invalid point lottery tables used for additional lottery, and the lottery for invalid points to be added for each type of effect ball and internal winning combination set in the current game. Specify the value information.

<Direction ball lottery table>
FIG. 79 is an effect ball random determination table used when effect balls to be set in the apocalypse during CZ are randomly selected. The information of the lottery value for the effect ball set for each final effect ball in the set is defined. The final effect ball in the set is, for example, an effect ball set in the region 103E farthest from the current game. Referring to FIG. 79, if the final effect ball in the set is a developed ball, the developed ball is not randomly selected. That is, during the CZ, two extended balls are not set in the apocalypse areas 103A to 103E in succession. On the other hand, when the final effect ball in the set is other (blank or avoidance ball), a developed ball is randomly selected with a predetermined probability.

  In the CZ, either the developed ball or the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse, but as shown in the effect ball lottery table, in the effect ball lottery, only the developed ball or blank (empty) is determined by lottery. Avoidance balls are not drawn. Here, the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse by rewriting the set advanced ball when the invalid point is 1 or more and the developed ball is set in the apocalypse. Note that when the invalid point is 1 or more, the timing of rewriting the advanced ball to the avoidance ball is arbitrary. For example, among the regions 103A to 103E, the developed ball may not be rewritten as the avoidance ball until the region 103B is reached. Alternatively, the end of CZ may be avoided by maintaining the developed ball at the time of the area 103A and invalidating the transfer lottery (C) itself.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIG. 80 is a CZ ART lottery table referred to in the transition to ART during CZ lottery (C). The CZ-mode ART lottery table defines information on a lottery value for the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) for each of the CZ mode and the BB winning. Referring to the ART random determination table during CZ, when the BB is not won, the probability of winning the ART is low when the CZ mode is 0, and the ART is always won when the CZ mode is 1 or more. In the CZ mode, the ART winning probability in the transfer lottery (C) and the ART advantage at the time of the ART winning need only be greater for the player as the numerical value is larger, and the ART is always won in the CZ modes 1 and 2. You don't need to set it up.

[Game during BB]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the bonus state (also referred to as “BB”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 41) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub-control circuit 42) side during BB. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a game during BB, and FIGS. 83 to 86 are data tables referred to during BB. The data tables shown in FIGS. 83 to 86 are stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Correspondence between main side / sub side of winning combination>
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 41) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub-control circuit 42) side during BB. is there. On the sub side, the winning combinations on the main side are managed by the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. Note that the correspondence other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 81 is the same as that in FIG.

<Overview of the game flow during BB>
As shown in FIG. 82, the game during BB is performed with the operation of BB as an opportunity. When the operation of the BB is performed, the BB mode is set to 0. Here, the BB mode is information for setting the ART winning probability in the lottery (F) for shifting to the ART performed during the BB. The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has BB modes 0 to 5 as BB modes, and the greater the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the ART winning probability.

  Subsequently, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started during the BB with the start operation, the lottery (F) for shifting to the ART performed at the start during the BB is performed. In the start lottery (F) at the start, regardless of the above-described BB mode, if the abbreviation “7-set lip” on the sub side is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART is won, and in other cases, The ART is not won.

  Subsequently, a mode up lottery of the BB mode is performed based on the internal winning combination during BB. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a winning combination that has a possibility of mode up for each current BB mode is defined. Although the details will be described later, the pachislot 1 is set so that as the BB mode increases, the types of winning combinations that may be upgraded are reduced.

  Thereafter, when the payout of medals is performed in response to the stop operation, it is determined whether or not the operation of the BB is terminated. In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when more than 59 medals are paid out during the BB, the operation of the BB ends. If no more than 59 medals have been paid out, the operation of the BB continues. On the other hand, if more than 59 medals have been paid out, a lottery (F) for shifting to ART at the end of BB is performed. The shift lottery (F) at the end of this is a lottery performed in accordance with the BB mode, and the greater the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the ART winning probability.

<ART lottery table at start during BB>
FIG. 83 is a BB start-time ART lottery table referred to in the transfer random determination (F) at the start during BB. The ART lottery table at the start during BB is referred to when the abbreviation “7 Aligned Lips” on the sub side is determined, and defines information on the lottery value for the result of the lottery transition to ART. As shown in FIG. 83, when the abbreviation “7 Aligned Lips” on the sub side is determined, ART is always won in the transition lottery (F) at the start.

  Here, referring to the winning combination correspondence table shown in FIG. 81, between the JAC2 flags (the state in which JACIN2 is carried over as an internal winning combination) and between the JAC3 flags (in the state in which JACIN3 is carried over as an internal winning combination), the main Only three of “F_312 upper row 7 alignment” to “F_2nd cross 7 alignment” on the side are “7 alignment lip”. On the other hand, between the JAC1 flags (the state in which JACIN1 is carried over as an internal winning combination), “F_312 upper 7 lip” to “F_2nd cross 7” on the main side include “F_J1 upper 7 lip” to “F_J1 cross 7”. A total of six, including three "rips," is a "seven-matched lip." Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the probability of winning in the ART in the shift lottery (F) at the start differs depending on the type of the carryover combination carried over during BB.

<Mode up lottery table during BB>
84 and 85 are BB mode up lottery tables referred to in the BB mode mode up lottery. The BB mode up lottery table defines information on lottery values for the current BB mode and the lottery result of the mode up lottery for each internal winning combination.

  Referring to the BB mode up lottery table, if the current BB mode is 0, if any of the pressing order bell, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanlip is determined as the internal winning combination, BB The mode will go up. In other words, there are six types of winning combinations that may be upgraded from the BB mode 0. Similarly, there are five types of winning combinations that have the possibility of mode up from BB mode 1, four types of winning combinations that have the possibility of mode up from BB mode 2, and There are three types of winning combinations that can be raised, and two types of winning combinations that can be upgraded from the BB mode 4.

  The winning combinations that have the possibility of mode-up from the BB mode 4 are included in the winning combinations that have the possibility of mode-up in the BB mode 3, and similarly, the winning combinations that have the possibility of mode-up from the BB mode 3. Is included in the winning combinations that are likely to be upgraded in the BB mode 2, and the winning combinations that are likely to be upgraded in the BB mode 2 are included in the winning combinations that are likely to be upgraded in the BB mode 1. , A winning combination that has a possibility of mode up from BB mode 1 is included in a winning combination that has a possibility of mode up in BB mode 0.

  As described above, in the pachislot 1, as the BB mode goes up, the types of winning combinations that may be mode-up are set to be small, and the winning combinations that have the possibility of mode up in the high BB mode are: , BB mode may be low even in a low state.

  In the BB mode up lottery tables illustrated in FIGS. 84 and 85, the BB mode can be skipped not one step at a time and the mode can be increased (for example, the BB mode can be changed from BB mode 0 to BB mode 1 without going through BB mode 1) The mode can be increased to two or more). In this regard, in the BB mode, the BB mode up lottery table may be configured so that the mode is upgraded only one step at a time. According to such a configuration, since the BB mode is increased only by one step, the degree of expectation during staying in each BB mode is reduced, so that the BB mode can be skipped and increased. Can be set to increase the degree of expectation. As a result, since it is easy to go up to a certain BB mode during BB, it is easy to create a game mode in which the BB mode gradually increases in mode.

  Here, referring to the BB mode up lottery table shown in FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, when the internal winning combination is the champion, the BB mode is likely to go up. Referring to the winning combination correspondence table shown in FIG. 81, among the JAC1 flags and the JAC3 flags, only five of “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” on the main side are “chan lip”. On the other hand, between the JAC2 flags, a total of 10 “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” plus “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” to “F_J3 "It has become. Therefore, in pachislot 1, the probability of raising the BB mode differs depending on the type of carryover carried over during BB, and as a result, the transition at the end of BB according to the type of carryover carried over during BB In the lottery (F), the probability of winning the ART is different.

<ART lottery table at end of BB>
FIG. 86 is a BB end ART lottery table referred to in the BB end transition lottery (F). The ART lottery table at the end of BB defines information on a lottery value for the result of the lottery transition to ART for each state during BB and each BB mode. The ART lottery table at the end of BB in FIG. 86 (A) is referred to in the main gaming state “RB gaming state in bonus state” and “RT4 gaming state in bonus state”, and BB in FIG. 86 (B). The end-time ART lottery table is referred to in the main gaming state “Bonus state RT0 gaming state” and “Bonus state RT2 gaming state” (see FIG. 6).

[Game during ART]
Subsequently, a flow of a game during the ART gaming state (also referred to as “during ART”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 106. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of a game flow during the enemy-determining ART, FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram showing a game flow during the battle ART, and FIGS. 89 to 106 are referred to during the ART. This is a data table. The data tables shown in FIGS. 88 to 106 are stored in the sub ROM 82.

<Overview of game flow during ART>
As shown in FIG. 87, when the lottery for transition to ART is won in the general game state (normal game state, high-probability game state, CZ) or the bonus state, the sub-control circuit 42 determines the state of the lottery transition. The ART state is randomly determined. The ART state is a state in which the degree of expectation regarding the continuation of the ART game state is different, and basically, the ART state having a larger numerical value is more likely to continue the ART (advantageous for the player). When the ART state is determined and the main game state shifts to the non-bonus winning RT4 game state, the enemy-determined ART starts.

  When the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation during the enemy determination ART, a lottery of the effect ball set in the apocalypse is performed. In the enemy determination ART, effect balls such as boss balls 1 to 8 for determining an enemy character to battle during the battle ART and ally balls for increasing the HP of the ally character are set in the apocalypse. . The ART state determined before the start of the enemy-determining ART is referred to in the lottery of the effect ball, and as the ART state increases, the number of boss balls in which the ally character easily wins in the apocalypse is set.

  The lottery of the effect ball is performed based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP described later and the ART state. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP "1" is set first, and thereafter, the boss MAP having a larger value is set as the same enemy determination ART continues.

  If the boss ball is set in the apocalypse immediately after the start of the enemy-determining ART, the enemy-determining ART may end immediately after the start. Therefore, at the start of the enemy determination ART, the guaranteed number of times that no effect ball is set in the apocalypse may be set. By doing so, the enemy-determining ART continues for the minimum number of guarantees, so that it is possible to prevent the enemy-determining ART from ending immediately after starting. The guaranteed number of times may be a predetermined fixed number of times (for example, five games) or may be determined by lottery at the start of the enemy determination ART. In addition, if the number of guarantees is different between the enemy-determined ART (so-called first hit) started when the lottery transition to the ART is won and the enemy-determined ART started when the ART gaming state is continued, It is good also as making it. Also in this case, the fixed number of guarantees may be different in both cases, and the lottery probability of the number of guarantees may be different in both cases. Further, when the ART gaming state continues, the guaranteed number of times may be made different depending on the type of the enemy character who has competed in the battle ART during the continuation. Also in this case, the fixed number of guarantees may be made different or the lottery probability of the number of guarantees may be made different depending on the type of the enemy character who has competed in the battle ART during continuation.

  Subsequently, the HP of the ally character is determined. The HP of the ally character determined here is used in the subsequent battle ART. Note that the HP of the ally character is determined based on an initial determination made in the first game of the enemy-determining ART and a lottery to be described later performed when an ally ball is set in the apocalypse.

  The initial determination differs depending on whether the current HP of the ally character is less than the initial value (HP50), and the sub-control circuit 42 initializes the HP of the ally character when the HP is less than the initial value. The value is determined, and if the value is equal to or more than the initial value, the HP of the current ally character is maintained as it is. In the pachislot 1, if an ally character wins in the battle ART, the enemy determination ART is performed again. At this time, since the HP of the ally character fluctuates according to the result of the continued ART (for example, the HP increase by the ally ball (additional lottery) in the continued enemy determination ART of the ART, or the battle ART of the continued ART In a new enemy determination ART after the enemy ball (enemy attack) due to a middle enemy ball (enemy attack), the HP of the ally character is set according to the fluctuation from the initial value.

  Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 42 performs control according to the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. For example, when a boss ball is set, it is determined whether or not a pressing order bell (which may include a common bell) is determined as an internal winning combination, and the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination. If so, the boss according to the type of the boss ball set in the apocalypse in this game is determined as the opponent in the battle ART.

  When the opponent of the battle ART is determined in this way, the HP of the enemy character to be the opponent is determined. The determination of the HP of the enemy character is performed based on the internal winning combination of the next game in which the opponent is determined. For example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the HP of the enemy character is reduced. Is determined. When the opponent is determined in the enemy-determining ART (the bell is pressed in the order of boss balls) and the HP of the enemy character is determined (internal winning of the next game), the enemy-determining ART ends and the next game starts. The battle ART will start.

  On the other hand, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a friend ball, the sub-control circuit 42 performs an additional lottery of the HP of the friend character. In the additional lottery, the HP of the ally character is increased (added) based on the internal winning combination. More specifically, when a friend ball is set in the apocalypse in the current game, an extra lottery is won for “bell winning” or more, and the HP of the friend character increases. Note that "bell winning" means that a pressing order bell or a common bell is determined as an internal winning combination, and "bell winning" or more means "bell winning" or pure loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong One of rare combinations such as cherry and chanlip is determined as an internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the enemy determination ART is repeatedly performed until an opponent is determined. On the other hand, when the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART and the HP of the enemy character is determined, the enemy determination ART ends, and the battle ART starts from the next game.

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts in response to the start operation during the battle ART, the lottery of the effect ball set in the apocalypse is performed. In the battle ART, effect balls such as friendly balls, enemy balls, and awakening balls for determining the character to attack are set in the apocalypse. As will be described later, parameters such as attack power, defense power, and speed are set for each enemy character, and the effect ball is randomly selected according to the speed of the enemy character. Specifically, an enemy character having a higher speed has a higher probability of randomly selecting an enemy ball, and an enemy character having a lower speed has a higher probability of randomly selecting an ally ball.

  Subsequently, during the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed based on the effect ball set in the internal winning combination and the apocalypse. Specifically, if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or an awakening ball, the ally character attacks the enemy character by "bell win" or more, and the enemy character's HP Decreases. In this game, the effect ball set in the apocalypse is the awakening ball, and in the case of "bell win" or more, the ally ball is stocked, and the enemy ball set in the apocalypse as much as the stocked ball Rewritten as a friendly ball.

  On the other hand, if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the enemy character attacks the ally character by “bell winning”, the HP of the ally character decreases, and the “rare role” In the "winning", the ally character attacks the enemy character, and the HP of the enemy character decreases. The “rare combination winning” means that any of the rare combinations such as pure loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, and chanlip are determined as the internal winning combination.

  Here, the amount of decrease in the HP of the ally character at the time of attacking the enemy character differs according to the attack power set for the enemy character. The lower the enemy character is, the smaller the decrease amount of the HP of the ally character is. Similarly, the amount of decrease in the HP of the enemy character at the time of attacking the ally character differs depending on the defense strength set for the enemy character. The lower the enemy character, the greater the amount of decrease in the enemy HP.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the battle ART ends when the HP of either the ally character or the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle. Specifically, when the HP of the ally character becomes 0, the battle ART ends and the ART game state for one set ends. On the other hand, when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0, the battle ART ends without changing the number of sets in the ART gaming state. If the number of sets in the ART gaming state remains at the end of the battle ART, the ART gaming state continues, and the battle ART shifts to a new enemy-determining ART.

<ART state lottery table>
FIG. 89 is an ART state lottery table which is referred to to randomly determine the ART state when the lottery transition to ART is won. The ART state lottery table defines information on a lottery value with respect to the ART state for each situation at the time of winning the lottery transition to the ART. For example, when the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to the ART performed during the normal game state and the high-probability game state is won, refer to the ART state lottery table in the “normal game state, high-probability game state” column. Then, the ART state is randomly selected. Similarly, in the case where the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART during CZ is won, the ART state is randomly selected with reference to the ART state lottery table corresponding to the CZ mode during CZ. In addition, when the lottery (F) for shifting to the ART during the bonus state is won, the ART state is randomly determined by referring to the ART state random determination table in the “bonus state column”.

  Referring to FIG. 89, when the transition lottery is won in the CZ mode 2, the ART state having a larger numerical value is randomly selected compared to the case where the transition lottery is won in the CZ modes 0 and 1. Become. Here, the CZ mode 2 is a CZ mode when the vehicle completes the CZ, and the ART state is a state where the ART is more advantageous to the player as the numerical value is larger (the ART is more likely to continue). It can be seen that, when the run is completed, not only the transition to the ART but also a more advantageous state for the player is obtained.

<Various data tables referenced during enemy determination ART>
Next, various data tables referred to during the enemy-determining ART will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Boss MAP lottery table>
FIG. 90 is a boss MAP random determination table for randomly determining a boss MAP for determining an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then, when the boss MAP data defined for each boss MAP is 0, a new boss MAP is randomly selected. The boss MAP lottery table of FIG. 90 is a table referred to when the boss MAP data is 0 to randomly select a new boss MAP.

  Referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 90, it can be seen that in the pachislot 1, every time a boss MAP is randomly selected, a boss MAP having a larger numerical value is more likely to be randomly selected. Specifically, the boss MAP "3" is likely to be randomly drawn from the boss MAP "1", and similarly, the boss MAP "5" is likely to be randomly determined from the boss MAP "3". On the other hand, when the boss MAP “4” is randomly selected from the boss MAP “1”, the boss MAP “3” is easily selected from the boss MAP “4”, so that the numerical value of the boss MAP once decreases. However, since the boss MAP "3" is randomly selected from the subsequent boss MAP "3", the boss MAP having a larger numerical value is randomly selected every time the boss MAP is randomly selected.

<Boss MAP data correspondence table>
The boss MAP defines boss MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of boss MAP data defined for each boss MAP. As shown in FIG. 91, the boss MAP1 defines boss MAP data "1" for the first to fourth games, and boss MAP data "0" for the fifth game. When the boss MAP data “0” is defined, a new boss MAP is randomly selected with reference to the boss MAP random determination table shown in FIG.

<Entrance Decision Art Production Ball Lottery Table>
FIG. 92 and FIG. 93 are production ball lottery tables during the enemy determination ART for determining the production ball to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. The effect ball lottery table during ART defines boss MAP data and information on the lottery value of the effect ball set for each ART state. In FIG. 92 (A), the information of the lottery value for the effect ball is defined for the boss MAP data “0”. When the MAP lottery is prioritized, it is not used.

  Referring to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, when the boss MAP data is “1”, “2”, or “4”, the effect ball to be randomly drawn is substantially constant regardless of the ART state, while the boss MAP data “3”. In the case of "", the effect ball to be randomly drawn according to the ART state is greatly different. For example, referring to the ART state “28” or more in the case of the boss MAP data “3”, it can be seen that one of the boss balls 7 and 8 is determined as the effect ball. Note that the boss balls 7, 8 are effect balls for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined when they are determined as opponents (see FIG. 57). Also, referring to the boss MAP data correspondence table shown in FIG. 91, it can be seen that the boss MAP data "3" is defined in many boss MAPs, and in many cases, the effect ball is based on the boss MAP data "3". It can be seen that is randomly selected.

  From this, it can be seen that the greater the value of the ART state, the more advantageous the ART for the player. Also, at the time of CZ completion, since the ART state is randomly determined to be “28” or more (see FIG. 89), at the time of CZ completion, It can be seen that the ART to be transferred is easy to continue.

<Artistic ball upgrade lottery table during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 94 is an effect ball upgrade random determination table during the enemy decision ART, which is referred to for rewriting the enemy ball set in the apocalypse to the ally ball during the enemy decision ART. The effect ball upgrade lottery table during the enemy-determined ART defines information on a lottery value with respect to the number of stocked ally balls for each internal winning combination. When the stock of one or more ally balls is determined by this lottery, the enemy ball is rewritten to a ally ball by an amount corresponding to the stock number. The timing at which the enemy ball is rewritten to a friend ball is arbitrary.

<Enemy Deciding ART Middle Friend Power Addition Lottery Table>
FIG. 95 is an enemy-determined ART middle ally power addition lottery table which is referred to at the time of the extra lottery of the HP of the ally character performed when the effect ball set in the apocalypse is the ally ball in this game. The enemy-determined ART medium ally power addition lottery table defines the amount of additional HP of the ally character for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 95, it can be seen that, when a friend ball is set in the apocalypse in the current game, the HP of the friend character increases above “bell win”.

<Boss power lottery table during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 96 is an enemy-determining ART boss power lottery table which is referred to when determining the HP of the enemy character in the next game in which the enemy character of the opponent is determined. The enemy-determining ART boss power lottery table defines information on a lottery value for the enemy character's HP for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 96, it can be seen that when a rare combination other than a pure loss has been won, the HP of the enemy character is determined to be smaller. In addition, the boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART may be a common table for all enemy characters to be opponents, or a different table may be provided for each enemy character. By providing a different table for each enemy character, it is possible to determine the HP according to the personality of the enemy character.

<Various data tables referenced during the battle ART>
Next, various data tables referred to during the battle ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 106. Before describing these data tables, the characteristics of each enemy character will be described.

<Boss status correspondence table>
FIG. 97 is a boss status correspondence table. The bosses 1 to 8 as opponent enemy characters have statuses such as attack power, defense power, and speed, respectively. For example, the boss 1 is of the attack type, and has a high attack power and a low speed. On the other hand, the boss 5 is of a speed type, and has a low attack power but a high speed. During the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed according to such characteristics of the enemy character.

  Note that the bosses 7 and 8 are enemy characters for which the continuation of the ART gaming state is determined when the boss is determined as an opponent. As described above, the ART gaming state is such that if the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the ally character becomes 0, or if the HP of the ally character becomes 0, the number of sets of the ART gaming state remains. If you continue. The manner in which the ART gaming state is continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined is arbitrary. For example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as the enemy characters, the HP of the enemy character is always set to 0 before the ally character. When the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the number of sets in the ART gaming state always becomes 1 or more (for example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters). In this case, the number of sets in the ART gaming state may be added by 1 or the number of sets in the ART gaming state may not be subtracted even if the HP of the ally character becomes 0.) In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the ART game state is increased even if the HP of the ally character becomes 0 by adding 1 to the set number of the ART game state. By making sure that the number of sets remains, the ART game state is continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the HP of the bosses 7 and 8 can be set to 0, it is also possible to shift to a so-called additional specialization zone. The type of the additional specialization zone is arbitrary, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is conceivable that the number of sets in the ART gaming state is added or the HP of the ally character is added as the additional specialization zone.

<Battle MAP lottery table>
98 to 100 are battle MAP lottery tables for randomly determining a battle MAP for determining an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The battle MAP lottery table is provided for each type of enemy character that is an opponent, and defines information on a lottery value for the battle MAP of the transfer destination for each battle MAP of the transfer source. FIG. 98 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 1, FIG. 99 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 2, and FIG. 100 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 5. As described later, the information on the lottery value specified in the battle MAP lottery table depends on the speed set for the enemy character.

<Battle MAP data correspondence table>
The battle MAP defines battle MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of battle MAP data defined in each battle MAP.

<Effect ball lottery table during Battle ART>
FIG. 102 is an effect ball random determination table during the battle ART for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The during-battle effect ball lottery table defines information on the lottery value of the effect ball set for each battle MAP data. In FIG. 102 (A), the information of the lottery value for the effect ball is also specified for the battle MAP data “0”, but a new boss than the effect ball lottery based on the MAP data “0” is specified. When the MAP lottery is prioritized, it is not used.

  Referring to FIG. 102, the battle MAP data “1” makes it easy to draw lots of enemy balls, while the battle MAP data “2” and “3” always makes lotteries of friendly or awakening balls. Referring to the battle MAP data comparison table shown in FIG. 101, it can be seen that seven battle MAPs are included in one set. Specifically, referring to the battle MAPs "1" to "7", the battle MAP data continues to be "2" and "3" after five "1" s, and the battle MAPs "8" to "14", It can be seen that the same applies to battle MAPs “15” to “21” and battle MAPs “22” to “28”.

  The battle MAPs “4”, “11”, “18”, and “25” are battle MAPs that are not actually randomly selected (the randomized value is 0 as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100). Therefore, in the pachislot 1, battle MAP data "1" in which battle MAP data "1" in which an enemy ball is easily determined is determined (one is not randomly selected), and battle MAP data "2" in which an ally ball or an awakening ball is randomly determined. One set includes six battle MAPs in which “3” is defined.

  Here, the process returns to the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIGS. In the battle MAP lottery table, the boss MAP "6", "7", "13", "14", "20", "21", and "MAP" in which the battle MAP data "2" and "3" for which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always determined by lottery are defined. 27 and 28 are highlighted. Referring to the battle MAP lottery table, the battle MAP basically shifts to a battle MAP having a larger numerical value one by one in one set, or always draws a friendly or awakening ball in one set. It turns out that it shifts to battle MAP. Specifically, from the battle MAP “1”, the battle MAP “2” having a larger numerical value by one or the battle MAP “6” in which the ally ball or the awakening ball in the same set is always randomly determined may be easily determined. I understand.

  By configuring the battle MAP and the battle MAP data in this manner, in the pachislot 1, the number of consecutive attacks by the enemy character is suppressed to a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment). That is, when the transition of the battle MAP is performed more than a predetermined number of times (five times in this embodiment), the transition to the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always performed at least once is performed. Note that, from the battle MAP “1”, the battle MAP “9” also shifts to the battle MAP “9”. Since the battle MAP “9” etc. is the second numerical battle MAP in the same set, the battle MAP shifts. If the number of times exceeds a predetermined number, the process shifts at least once to a battle MAP in which an ally ball or the like is randomly drawn.

  Also, when comparing the battle MAP lottery tables in FIGS. 98 to 100, it can be seen that the probability that the ally ball or the awakening ball will be transferred to the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always randomized differs depending on the type of the opponent enemy character. For example, if the attack type boss 1 (see FIG. 97) with a low speed is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. 98, the battle MAPs “6” and “7” in which teammate balls and the like are always drawn randomly. It can be seen that the transition is relatively easy. When the boss 2 (see FIG. 97), which is a defense type and has a normal speed, is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. Similarly, when the speed type boss 5 (refer to FIG. 97) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. It can be seen that it is difficult to shift to battle MAP “6” and “7” to be performed, and basically, it shifts to battle MAP having larger numerical values in order from battle MAP “1”.

  Thus, in the battle MAP lottery table, the information of the lottery value is defined based on the speed set for the enemy character. As a result, during the battle ART, the effect ball is set based on the speed set for the enemy character, and the enemy ball is set more as the enemy is faster, and the ally is set more as the enemy is slower. Become.

<Damage lottery table during Battle ART>
FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 are battle ART damage lottery tables used when reducing the HP of an enemy character or an ally character in the battle ART. During the battle ART, the damage lottery table shows the type of the enemy character as the opponent, the type of the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game, and the HP of the enemy character or the ally character for each internal winning combination for the amount of reduction. Specifies the information of the lottery value.

  FIG. 103 is a battle ART damage lottery table used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball. In FIG. 103, in order to make it possible to compare the difference due to the enemy character's status (attack power), FIG. FIG. 103B shows a battle ART damage lottery table used when the boss 5 having low attack power (see FIG. 97) is an enemy character. Comparing the damage lottery table during the battle ART in FIG. 103, when the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, when the opponent is the boss 1, “15” is easily determined as the decrease amount of the HP of the ally character. On the other hand, when the opponent is the boss 5, it is understood that “5” is easily determined as the decrease amount of the HP of the ally character.

  Also, referring to FIG. 103, even if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, if a rare role other than pure loss is won, the enemy character is not HP will decrease. By configuring the damage lottery table during the battle ART in this way, the player expects that the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination during the battle ART, and can enhance the interest during the ART. .

  FIG. 104 is a battle ART damage lottery table used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or an awakening ball. In FIG. 104, in order to make it possible to compare the difference depending on the status (defense power) of the enemy character, the damage random determination table during battle ART used when the boss 1 (see FIG. 97) having high defense power is the enemy character is shown. FIG. 104B shows a battle ART damage random determination table used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 97) having a low defense force is an enemy character. Comparing the damage lottery table during the battle ART in FIG. 104, when the opponent is the boss 1, “5” or the like is easily determined as the decrease amount of the enemy character's HP, while when the opponent is the boss 5, the enemy character is the enemy character. It can be understood that “10” or the like is easily determined as the amount of decrease in HP.

  Thus, by providing the damage random determination table during the battle ART according to the type of the enemy character to be the opponent, the status (attack power and defense power) of the enemy character can be reflected, and the game during the battle ART can be variously performed. Can be

<ART state lottery table>
FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 are ART state lottery tables for randomly selecting a new ART state when it is determined to continue to ART in the battle ART. The ART state lottery table defines the type of the opponent's enemy character, the ART continuation count, and the information of the lottery value for the ART state of the transfer destination for each ART state of the transfer source. 105 and 106 show the ART state lottery tables that are referred to when the opponent enemy character is one of the bosses 1 to 6. When the opponent's enemy character is one of the bosses 1 to 6, when the transfer source ART state is “31” to “33”, the same ART state is determined as the transfer destination ART state. On the other hand, when the opponent enemy character is one of the bosses 7 and 8 and the transfer source ART state is “31” to “33”, although not shown, a different ART state (for example, the ART state “3”) is used. ") Is determined as the ART state of the transfer destination.

  Referring to FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, it can be seen that when the number of ART continuations exceeds 5, the state easily transitions to the ART state having a large numerical value.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation of pachislot under control of main CPU]
First, a procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to a flowchart (hereinafter, referred to as a main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot 1, the main CPU 51 performs power-on processing (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area in which data must be deleted for each unit game (game), such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance / start check process (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 16S is checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for internal winning combination lottery and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number for internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S6). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 53 and used in the reel stop control processing in S11.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the start command data includes various types of information necessary for producing an effect such as an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a wait process (S8). In this processing, when the elapsed time from the previous game start has not elapsed a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds), the main CPU 51 waits until the wait time has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is performed by an interrupt process (see FIG. 112 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is controlled to accelerate until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and thereafter, is controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start command generation and storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S11). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S6, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 collates the combination of the symbols displayed on the winning line after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R have stopped with the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 9 to 21). . Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol combination (combination) specified by the symbol combination table is displayed on the pay line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal payout process (S13). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the number of payouts of the symbol combination determined in S12, and medals are paid out.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning operation command generation and storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing for executing various effects and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 for managing the timing of ending the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an RT check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 51 updates the RT gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Note that the RT check process is a process of updating the RT gaming state in the bonus non-operation state, and is omitted in the bonus state and the state between the flags. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S31). That is, the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to grasp the current game state, and sets an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 22 to 26) corresponding to the grasped game state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S32). Then, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table, acquires the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S33). The winning number is information assigned to each winning combination that may be randomly selected in the internal lottery table. For example, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the winning number “1” is assigned to “losing”, and the winning number “2” is assigned to “F_black-black-black”. (See FIG. 22). Further, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the winning number “1” is assigned to “F_maintenance lip”, and the winning number “2” is assigned to “F_123 lip”. (See FIG. 24).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S33 is less than 0 (negative value) (S34).

  In S34, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S35). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S36). In S36, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO), the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S33, and repeats the processing from S33.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the winning numbers have been checked in S36 (YES), the main CPU 51 sets “0” as a data pointer (S37). That is, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the small part / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S34, when the main CPU 51 determines in S34 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (YES), the main CPU 51 determines the calculation result according to the current winning number. Then, the small pointer / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are obtained (S38).

  Then, after the processing of S37 or S38, the main CPU 51 acquires an internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S39).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S40).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S41). In S41, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S48 described later.

  On the other hand, in S41, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer. (S42).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S43).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the role of BB is being carried over (S44). Referring to FIG. 49, the hand associated with BB is stored in any of bits 0 to 4 of the carryover hand storage area. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “1” is stored in any of bits 0 to 4 of the carryover combination storage area. In S44, when the main CPU 51 determines that the role related to BB is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of S46.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S44 that the role related to BB is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT5 gaming state flag to ON (S45), and then proceeds to the processing of S46. Specifically, “1” is set to bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51). By this processing, when the combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus non-winning state, the gaming state can be shifted to the RT5 gaming state of the flag state.

  Next, in the process of S46, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the role related to JACIN is being carried over. Referring to FIG. 49, the hand associated with JACIN is stored in any of bits 5 to 7 of the carryover hand storage area. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether “1” is stored in any of bits 5 to 7 of the carryover combination storage area. In S46, when the main CPU 51 determines that the role related to BB is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of S48.

  On the other hand, in S46, when the main CPU 51 determines that the role related to JACIN is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT4 gaming state flag to ON (S47), and then proceeds to the processing of S48. Specifically, “1” is set to bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51). Note that the combination related to JACIN may be determined as an internal winning combination only during the bonus state. Therefore, when the combination relating to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, The state can be shifted to the bonus state RT4 gaming state.

  Next, in the process of S48, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the bonus end check processing performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 107) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) and determines whether or not “BB” is operating (S51). In S51, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is not operating (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S51, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is operating (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S52). ). If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals has exceeded 59 during the bonus state.

  In S52, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) and sets “RB”. It is determined whether or not is operating (S53). In S53, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is not operating (NO), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to S56.

  On the other hand, in S53, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is operating (YES), the main CPU 51 performs an RB termination process (S54). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the winning number counter and the game number counter, and turns off the game state flag (RB game state flag) corresponding to the active “RB”. Next, the main CPU 51 turns on the RT2 gaming state flag (S55).

  Next, in S56, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end process. In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to the operating “BB”. As shown in S53 to S56, when the operation of the BB (bonus state) is completed during the RB game state, the state shifts to the RT2 game state in which the bonus is not won after the BB ends. On the other hand, when the operation of the BB ends in a state other than the RB gaming state, the state shifts to the non-bonus winning state while the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command generation and storage process (S57). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize that the bonus state has ended, and can perform a predetermined effect at the time of the bonus end. After the processing of S57, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) and sets “RB Is operating (S58). In S58, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is not operating (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S58, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is in operation (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the winning number counter or the game number counter is “0”. (S59). When the possible winning number counter is "0", it means that the symbol combination other than "losing" is displayed eight times during the bonus RB gaming state, and the possible gaming counter is "0". In the case of, it means that 12 games have been played in the bonus state RB game state.

  In S59, when the main CPU 51 determines that neither the winning number counter nor the number-of-games counter is “0” (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and proceeds to the main flow (FIG. It moves to S16 of (see 107).

  On the other hand, in S59, when the main CPU 51 determines that either the winning number counter or the number-of-games counter is "0" (YES), the main CPU 51 performs an RB end process (S60). Next, the main CPU 51 turns on the RT2 gaming state flag (S61), ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the bonus end check processing performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 107) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol combination relating to “BB” (see FIG. 27) is displayed (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination related to "BB" has been displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 performs a bonus activation process (S72). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the BB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to ON, and sets “59” in the bonus end number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the RT5 gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to off (S73). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command generation and storage process (S74). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. With this processing, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize that the bonus state has started, and can perform a predetermined effect at the time of starting the bonus.

  After ending the processing of S74, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination of “BB” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 displays the symbol combination of “JACIN” (see FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not it has been (S75). In S75, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination related to "JACIN" has been displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 performs an RB operation process (S76). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the RB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to ON, and sets “8” in the possible winning number counter to “12” in the possible gaming number counter. .

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the RT4 gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 51) to off (S77). After finishing the process of S77, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S75, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination related to “JACIN” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed. (S78). In S78, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination relating to “Replay” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 107). Move to S17.

  On the other hand, in S78, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination relating to "Replay" has been displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 requests automatic insertion of medals (S79). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. Then, after the processing of S79, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check processing performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is any of the non-bonus winning state RT0 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state, or the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state (S81). . In S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that none of the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is not (NO), The CPU 51 proceeds to the process in S85 described later.

  On the other hand, in S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game state is any one of the non-bonus winning state RT0 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state, or the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state (YES). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “bell spilled eyes” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed (S82). In S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that neither “bell spilled eyes” nor “RT1 transition lip” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the processing of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that either “bell spilled eyes” or “RT1 shift lip” has been displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the RT game state flag that is currently on, and turns off the RT1. Turn on the gaming state. That is, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the “bell spilling eye” or the “RT1 transition lip” is displayed, the main CPU 51 Shifts the gaming state to a non-bonus winning state RT1 gaming state. Next, the main CPU 51 sets 5 to the RT game number counter (S84).

  When the determination in S81 or S82 is NO or subsequent to S84, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the non-bonus winning state RT0 gaming state (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game is not in the bonus non-winning RT0 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the processing of S91 described later.

  On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game is in the non-bonus winning state of the RT0 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “RT4 shift lip” is displayed (S86). In S86, when the main CPU 51 determines that the “RT4 shift lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the RT4 gaming state flag. That is, when the “RT4 shift lip” is displayed in the bonus non-winning state of the RT0 gaming state, the main CPU 51 shifts the gaming state to the bonus non-winning state of the RT4 gaming state.

  On the other hand, in S88, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RT4 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (S88). In S88, when the main CPU 51 determines that the “RT3 shift lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the RT3 gaming state flag. That is, when the “RT3 shift lip” is displayed in the bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state, the main CPU 51 shifts the gaming state to the bonus non-winning state RT3 gaming state. Next, the main CPU 51 sets 5 to the RT game number counter (S90).

  When NO is determined in S85 or S88, or following S87 and S90, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won or the RT3 gaming state in which the bonus is not won (S91). ). In S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that neither the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state nor the RT3 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the RT check processing and proceeds to the main processing. Move to S2 of the flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that either the non-bonus winning state RT1 gaming state or the bonus non-winning state RT3 gaming state is present (YES), the main CPU 51 updates the RT game number counter (YES). 1 is subtracted) (S92). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT game number counter is 0 (S93). In S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the RT check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S93 that the RT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the currently ON RT game state flag (S94). By turning off the currently on RT game state flag by this processing, the game state shifts to the RT0 game state in which the bonus is not won. When this process ends, the main CPU 51 ends the RT check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 107).

<Interrupt processing under control of main CPU>
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 51. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves a register (S101). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S102). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S103). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs, for example, a process of subtracting a predetermined timer value for each interrupt process. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a communication data transmission process (S104). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub-control circuit 42 as appropriate.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S105). In this process, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the main CPU 51 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R, and then rotates each reel at a constant speed. The drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 51 waits until the updated symbol counter matches the value corresponding to the expected stop position (the symbol at the expected stop position reaches an area on the pay line in the display window), and waits for the corresponding reel. The driving of the corresponding stepping motor is controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp / 7-segment driving process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 51 controls the drive of the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register return process (S107). Then, after that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt processing.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the power-on process of the sub CPU 81 when the power is turned on.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process (S320). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs an error check on the sub RAM 83 and the like and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, a sound control task, which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, and a mother task, which is a task group of VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 114 (S321). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 81 to receive the timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 81 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, This is a process for executing a process for controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 115 (S322). In the sound control task, the state of sound output from the speakers 21L and 21R is controlled by the sub CPU 81.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the mother task shown in FIG. 116 (S323), and terminates the power-on process. The mother task is a task group of VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interruption synchronization, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interruption signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 10 when one frame of video is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 10. Is used.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task started in S321 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 113.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S330). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a lamp-related data initialization process (S331).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a timer interrupt wait (S332). In this processing, until the sub CPU 81 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 81 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization.

  As a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization, for example, there is a main board communication task which is a task group of the command reception interrupt synchronization. In addition, a task group (not shown) for power supply interruption synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like are given.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the sound control task started in S322 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 113.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process of sound-related data related to a sound output state from the speakers 21L and 21R (S340). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the task having the next priority to the task group of the timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S341).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a sound data analysis process (S342), performs a sound effect execution process (S343), and executes the process of S341.

<Mother task>
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the mother task started in S323 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 81 starts a main task (S350), starts a main board communication task (S351), and starts an animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the main task started in S350 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 81 executes a VSYNC interrupt initialization process (S360), and waits for a VSYNC interrupt (S361). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a drawing process (S362), and executes the process of S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task started in S351 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes initialization of a communication message queue (S370), and executes a check of a received command (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a command different from the previous command has been received (S372). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 executes the process of S371.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the received command is a regular command, creates game information from the received command, and creates the game information. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 83 (S373). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 119 (S374), and executes the processing of S371.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing executed in S374 of the main board communication task shown in FIG. 119.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 121 (S380), executes the lamp data determination processing (S381), executes the sound data determination processing (S382), and registers the determined data. Then (S383), the command analysis processing ends.

<Animation task>
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the animation task started in S352 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 checks a change from the previous game information (S390). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes an object control process (S391). Specifically, when a check result indicating that the game information has changed is obtained in S390, the sub CPU 81 controls the image in accordance with the change in the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 executes an animation task management process (S392). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 manages the order of images displayed in various effects and the like. After executing the animation task management process, the sub CPU 81 executes the process of S390.

<Direction content decision processing>
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination processing executed in S380 of the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 119.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a start command has been received (S401). Here, if it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 122 (S402), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving a start command, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received (S403). Here, when it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command (S404), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a reel stop command has been received (S405). Here, when it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a process at the time of receiving the reel stop command (S406), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing when the reel stop command is received, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S407). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command shown in FIG. 132 (S408), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the processing at the time of winning operation command reception, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a winning operation command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a bonus end command has been received (S409). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command shown in FIG. 137 (S410), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a bonus start command has been received (S411). Here, when it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a process at the time of receiving the bonus start command (S412), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus start command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus start command, the BB mode “0” is set as the initial value of the BB mode.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 executes a process according to the other received command (S413), and ends the effect content determination process.

<Start command reception processing>
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the start command receiving process executed in S402 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 121.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (S421). If it is determined in S421 that the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs a normal start-time CZ / ART random determination shown in FIG. 123 (S422). In the normal start CZ / ART lottery, the above-mentioned start lottery (A) (D) and the like are performed based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game.

  Subsequent to the process of S422, the sub CPU 81 performs an apocalypse operation process shown in FIG. 124 (S423). In this apocalypse operation processing, the sub CPU 81 performs control to start or end the operation of the apocalypse.

  Subsequent to the processing of S423, or if it is determined in S421 that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the RT4 gaming state in which the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S424). More specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the gaming state managed by the sub side is the normal gaming state and the RT gaming state managed by the main side is the RT4 gaming state. If it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a high-probability gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 125 (S425). In this probability game state transition processing, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery of avoidance points in order to transition the game state from the normal game state to the high probability game state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S425, or if it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state of the RT4 gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. (S426). If it is determined in S426 that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs a high-probability medium effect registration process shown in FIG. 126 (S427). In this high-probability effect registration process, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect (push order navigation) to prevent the main gaming state from shifting from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state based on the avoidance point. .

  Subsequent to the process of S427 or in S426, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the gaming state is CZ (S428). If it is determined in S428 that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a CZ start-time ART lottery process shown in FIG. 127 (S429). In the ART random determination process at the time of CZ start, the sub CPU 81 performs the above-described transition random determination (C) and the like.

  Subsequent to the process of S429 or in S428, if it is determined that the gaming state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is a bonus state (during BB) (S430). ). If it is determined in S430 that the gaming state is the bonus state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the BB ART random determination process shown in FIG. 128 (S431). In the BB during ART random determination process, the sub CPU 81 performs the above-described transition random determination (F) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S431 or in S430, when determining that the gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state (during the ART). (S432). If it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is the ART gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the processing during ART shown in FIG. 129 (S433), and ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command. In the processing during the ART, the sub CPU 81 determines the contents of the effect in the enemy determination ART and the battle ART. On the other hand, if it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command.

<Normal Start CZ / ART Lottery Processing>
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the normal start time CZ / ART lottery process executed in S422 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 122.

  First, based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the current game, the sub CPU 81 refers to the start-time ART random determination table shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 and shifts to CZ • ART. (A) and (D) are performed (S441). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not CZ is won in this lottery (S442). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the CZ to the game state of the next game (S443), and ends the normal start CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if the CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART has been won in the lottery in S441 (S444). If the ART has not been won (NO), the normal start CZ / ART lottery process is terminated. If the ART has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the gaming state to the ART gaming state. The enemy determination ART is set (S445). Since the ART gaming state is the main side RT4 gaming state, the RT4 transition lip is displayed, and the main side must transition to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, “setting the enemy-determining ART of the ART gaming state as the gaming state” does not mean that the gaming state of the next game becomes the enemy-determining ART of the ART gaming state, but the RT4 gaming state on the main side. Means that the sub-side game state becomes the enemy-determined ART of the ART game state. This is the same in the following.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89, randomly determines the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of the ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S446). When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal start-time CZ / ART lottery process.

<Revelation operation processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the apocalypse operation processing executed in S423 of the processing at the time of reception of the start command shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S451). At this time, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S457.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S452). Specifically, referring to the apocalypse operation lottery table of FIG. 67 (C), the addition amount or the subtraction amount of the guaranteed number of times is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S452 (S453).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S454). If it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 randomly draws the effect ball, sets it in the apocalypse (S455), and proceeds to the process of S462. Specifically, the sub CPU 81 randomly selects the apocalypse MAP, and randomly determines the effect ball based on the MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 68 to 71). In this process, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub CPU 81 upgrades the effect ball set in the apocalypse with a predetermined probability.

  On the other hand, when determining that the guaranteed number of times is not one or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 updates the apocalypse flag to off, ends the operation of the apocalypse (S456), and then proceeds to the process of S462.

  If it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S457). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery tables of FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), the addition amount of the guaranteed number of times is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S457 (S458).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S459). If it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the apocalypse flag and starts the operation of the apocalypse (S460). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 randomly draws the effect ball and sets it to the apocalypse (S461). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 randomly selects the apocalypse MAP, and randomly determines the effect ball based on the MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 68 to 71).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery for shifting to a winning mode based on the internal winning combination (S462). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 randomly selects the transfer destination winning mode with reference to the mode shift lottery tables shown in FIGS. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result as a winning mode of the next game (S463), and ends the apocalypse operation process.

<High-probability game state transition processing>
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the high-probability game state transition processing executed in S425 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 122.

  First, the sub CPU 81 randomly selects an avoidance point based on the internal winning combination (S465). More specifically, the sub CPU 81 randomly selects the avoidance point addition amount with reference to the avoidance table lottery table shown in FIG. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery of the avoidance point has been won, that is, whether or not one or more avoidance points are added (S466). If a win has been achieved (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets an avoidance point based on the lottery result (S467), and ends the high-probability gaming state transition processing. On the other hand, if the winning has not been achieved (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high-probability gaming state transition processing.

<High-probability medium effect registration processing>
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the high-probability effect presentation registration processing executed in S427 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 122.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip is determined as an internal winning combination (S471). If it is determined that neither the pushing order bell nor the pushing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the avoidance point is 1 or more (S472). When determining that the avoidance point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets navigation data that is the correct answer in the pressing order (S473). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the avoidance point (S474), and ends the high-probability effect registration process.

  As described above, in the high-probability gaming state, when the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct pressing order is notified based on the avoidance point. For the player, by playing the game according to the notification, the high-probability gaming state can be continued, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Here, in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win a lottery transition to the ART than in the normal gaming state, and when the correct pushing order is notified in the high-probability gaming state, the player has the high-probability gaming state. The benefit of continuing is already granted. Therefore, when the push order of the correct answer is notified in the high-probability game state, the lottery result of the shift lottery in the game may be discarded (invalid). This can prevent the profit of the player from becoming excessive.

<ART lottery processing at CZ start>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a CZ start-time ART lottery process executed in S429 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 122.

  First, the sub CPU 81 updates the number of continuous games in CZ (S481). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is the first game of CZ (S482). When it is determined that the game is the first game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently randomly selects and sets CZ_MAP. Specifically, the sub CPU 81 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 76 and randomly selects and sets the CZ_MAP used during CZ (S483).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point (S484). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point with reference to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIG.

  After S484 or if it is determined in S482 that the game is not the first game of CZ (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently randomly draws an effect ball and sets it in Apocalypse (S485). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 refers to a CZ effect ball lottery table shown in FIG. 79 and randomly draws and sets effect balls based on the last effect ball currently set. In this process, when the invalid point is 1 or more, the sub CPU 81 rewrites the developed ball set in the apocalypse to the avoidance ball.

  It is determined whether or not the game is the 30th game of the CZ (S486). If it is determined that the game is the 30th game of the CZ (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the enemy determination ART in the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S487). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 randomly selects and sets the ART state based on the CZ mode 2 with reference to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89 (S488). Then, the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ start-time ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not the 30th game of the CZ (NO), the sub CPU 81 randomly selects and adds invalid points based on the internal winning combination (S489). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 refers to the invalid point lottery tables shown in FIGS. 78 (B) and 78 (C) and randomly selects an additional amount of the invalid point and adds it to the currently held invalid point.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the current game is a developed ball and the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination (S490). When all the conditions are satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the invalid point is 1 or more (S491). When determining that the invalid point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently subtracts 1 from the invalid point (S492), and sets the present CZ mode notification effect data (S493).

  For example, the effect data indicates or presents that the current CZ mode is 1 or that the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 in a few games (for example, two or three times). Production data for Specifically, the production data with different probabilities set when the CZ mode is 1 and when the CZ mode is 0, when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a game within a predetermined number of times, and when the CZ mode is within a predetermined number of times This is effect data having different probabilities that are set when the game does not go from 0 to 1 in the game. This allows the player to estimate or grasp the current CZ mode when the number of invalid points is one or more.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S491 that the invalid point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the CZ ART random determination table shown in FIG. 80 and shifts to ART based on the current CZ mode. ), And sets the lottery completion flag to ON (S494). As described above, during the CZ, when the development ball is set and the push order bell is won, the shift lottery (C) is performed. However, when the answer is correct in the stop order at the stop, the shift lottery (C) lottery result is invalidated. Is done. The lottery completion flag is used to determine whether to invalidate or maintain the lottery result at the time of stopping. When the processing of S494 is completed, the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ start-time ART lottery processing.

  On the other hand, if any of the conditions is not satisfied in S490 (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the avoidance ball ( S495). If the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is determined to be the avoidance ball (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for the current CZ mode notification (S496), and the CZ start ART lottery process. To end. Also, in S495, when it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is not the avoidance ball (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ start-time ART lottery process.

<ART lottery processing during BB>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the BB ART lottery process executed in S431 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 122.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the seven matching lips have been determined as the internal winning combination (S501). If it is determined that the seven matching rips are determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the BB start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 83 and performs the transfer lottery (F) to the ART during BB. . Referring to FIG. 83, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART winning flag to ON in order to win the transfer lottery (F) without fail (S502). The ART winning flag is information indicating that the ART has been won in the middle of the bonus state, and is referred to when the bonus ends.

  Subsequent to S502 or if it is determined in S501 that the seven matching rips have not been determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently refers to the BB mode up lottery table shown in FIGS. 84 and 85. Then, a mode up lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (S503). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the BB mode based on the lottery result (S504), and ends the BB ART random determination process.

<Process during ART>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the processing during ART executed in S433 of the processing at the time of reception of the start command shown in FIG. 122.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is during the enemy determination ART (S511). If it is determined that the enemy-determining ART is not being performed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the battle ART processing shown in FIG. 131 (S517), and ends the ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the enemy-determining ART is being performed (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the determined flag is on (S512). The determined flag is information for determining whether or not the opponent enemy character is determined during the enemy determination ART. When determining that the determined flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs the enemies-determining ART processing shown in FIG. 130 (S516), and ends the ART processing.

  On the other hand, when determining that the determined flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the HP of the enemy character based on the internal winning combination with reference to the boss power random determination table during enemy determination ART shown in FIG. (S513). Subsequently, effect data for introducing an enemy character is set (S514). The effect data for introducing the enemy character is effect data for displaying the boss status shown in FIG. 97, for example. Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 turns off the determined flag, sets the battle ART to the game state of the next game (S515), and ends the processing during the ART.

<Process during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the enemies-determining ART processing executed in S516 of the ART processing shown in FIG. 129.

  First, the sub-CPU 81 randomly draws an effect ball and sets it to Apocalypse (S521). More specifically, the sub CPU 81 randomly determines an effect ball based on the boss MAP data specified in the boss MAP and the ART state (see FIGS. 90 to 93). In this process, the sub CPU 81 also performs stock lottery of the friendly ball, and if there is stock, rewrites the boss ball set in the apocalypse to the friendly ball (see FIG. 94). When the guaranteed number of games that guarantees the number of continuous games of the enemy-determined ART is used as described above, the process of S521 may not be performed during the guaranteed number of games.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 performs an HP initial setting process of the ally character (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 81 sets the HP of the ally character to the initial value when the HP of the ally character is less than the initial value (HP50).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a boss ball (S523). When it is determined that the boss ball is set (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a bell is won (S524). At this time, if it is determined that a bell has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the enemies determining ART processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the bell has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines an enemy character corresponding to the boss ball as an opponent (S525). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the determined flag to ON (S526), and ends the enemies determining ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S523 that the boss ball is not set (that is, the ally ball is set) (NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the enemy-determined ART middle ally power addition lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the winning combination, a lottery is performed on the HP of the ally character (S527). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the HP of the ally character based on the lottery result (S528), and ends the enemy-determining ART processing.

<Processing during Battle ART>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the battle ART processing executed in S517 of the ART processing shown in FIG. 129.

  First, the sub CPU 81 randomly draws an effect ball and sets it in Apocalypse (S531). Specifically, the sub-CPU 81 randomly selects an effect ball based on the battle MAP data specified in the battle MAP (see FIGS. 98 to 102). In this process, the sub CPU 81 also rewrites the enemy ball based on the wake-up ball, and when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a wake-up ball and is equal to or more than a bell win. Rewrites the enemy ball set in Apocalypse to a friend ball.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 performs a damage random determination based on the effect ball and the internal winning combination (S532). Specifically, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse is an enemy ball in this game, the sub CPU 81 performs damage lottery with reference to the battle ART damage lottery table illustrated in FIG. 103, When the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or an awakening ball, the damage lottery is performed with reference to the battle ART damage lottery table illustrated in FIG. 104.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the HP of the enemy character or the ally character based on the lottery result (S533). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the HP of the ally character is equal to or less than 0 (S534). If the HP of the ally character is determined to be 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART game state, sets the normal game state to the next game state (S535), and ends the battle ART processing.

  On the other hand, when determining that the HP of the ally character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (S536). When determining that the HP of the enemy character is not equal to or less than 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the battle ART processing. On the other hand, if the HP of the enemy character is determined to be 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 105 and 106 to change the ART state based on the type of the enemy character and the number of continuations. Lottery is set and set (S537). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the enemy determination ART to the game state of the next game (S538), and ends the battle ART processing.

<Processing when receiving a winning operation command>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, which is executed in S408 of the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 121.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (S541). When it is determined that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs a normal end CZ / ART random determination shown in FIG. 133 (S542). In the normal end CZ / ART lottery, the above-mentioned start lottery (A) (D) and the like are performed based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game.

  Subsequent to the processing of S542, or if it is determined in S541 that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the RT4 gaming state in which the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S543). When determining that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs a high-probability transition determination process illustrated in FIG. 134 (S544). In this high-probability transition determination process, it is determined whether or not it is possible to transition from the RT4 gaming state in the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state.

  Subsequent to the process of S544, or if it is determined in S543 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. (S545). When determining that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a high-probability end determination process illustrated in FIG. 135 (S546). In the high-probability end determination process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether to end the high-probability gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

  Subsequent to the processing of S546 or in S545, when determining that the gaming state is not the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is CZ (S547). If it is determined that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently performs a CZ lottery result management process shown in FIG. 136 (S548). In the CZ lottery result management processing, the sub CPU 81 determines whether to maintain or invalidate the above-described transition lottery (C) performed in the middle of CZ.

  When the processing of S548 is completed, or when it is determined that the game state is not CZ (S547) (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of the winning operation command reception.

<CZ / ART lottery process at normal end>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the normal end-time CZ / ART lottery process executed in S542 of the winning operation command receiving process shown in FIG. 132.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S551). If it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of normal termination.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is equal to or more than a bell prize (S552). If it is determined that the winning is not equal to or greater than the bell prize (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ / ART random determination process at the time of normal termination.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that it is equal to or more than the bell winning (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently refers to the reel-stopping ART lottery table shown in FIG. 72 based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. Then, the lottery (A) (D) for shifting to CZ and ART is performed (S553).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not CZ is won in this lottery (S554). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the CZ to the game state of the next game (S555), and ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of normal termination.

  On the other hand, if the CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART has been won (S556). If the ART has not been won (NO), the CZ / ART random determination process at the time of normal termination ends, whereas if the ART has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the gaming state to the ART gaming state. The enemy determination ART is set (S557). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 randomly selects the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of the ART winning with reference to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89, and sets the lottery result (S558). When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process.

<High-probability transition determination processing>
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the high-probability transition determination process executed in S544 of the winning operation command receiving process shown in FIG. 132.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a spilled bell or an RT1 transition lip is displayed (S561). If it is determined that the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the number of replays and the avoidance point (S562), and ends the high-probability transition determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the spilled bell nor the RT1 transition lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the avoidance point is 1 or more (S563). If it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the high-probability gaming state to the next gaming state (S564). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 clears the number of replays (S565), and ends the high-probability transition determination process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the avoidance point is not one or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay other than the RT1 transition lip is displayed (S566). If it is determined that the symbol combination related to the replay other than the RT1 transition lip is not displayed (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high-probability transition determination processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that a symbol combination related to replay other than the RT1 transition lip has been displayed (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the number of replays (S567), and ends the high-probability transition determination processing.

  As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when the main side shifts to the RT4 game state during the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained until the avoidance point is given, and the avoidance point is given. Transition to the high-probability gaming state. As in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the situation in which the game machine has shifted to the RT4 gaming state by chance is not a penalty section but a chance section, it is necessary to adjust the balance so as not to be too advantageous for the player. In this regard, even if the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state, it is possible to adjust the balance between the profits of both the player and the gaming shop by treating the main side as the normal gaming state until the avoidance point is given. Of course, it is sufficient that the balance between the two benefits is adjusted in the entire gaming machine, so that the main game may immediately shift from the normal gaming mode to the high-probability gaming mode when the main mode shifts to the RT4 gaming mode.

<High-probability termination determination processing>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the high-probability-end determining process executed in S546 of the winning-operation-time command receiving process shown in FIG. 132.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a spilled bell or an RT1 transition lip is displayed (S571). If it is determined that neither the spilled bell nor the RT1 transition lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the high probability end determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip has been displayed (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the avoidance point (S572). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S573), and ends the high-probability end determination processing.

<CZ Lottery Result Management Processing>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the CZ lottery result management processing executed in S548 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG. 132.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery completion flag is on (S581). When determining that the lottery completion flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ in-lot lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the lottery completion flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the answer is correct in the order of pressing (S582). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a stop operation has been performed in the pressing order according to the pressing order bell that has been won in S490 of FIG. 127, in other words, according to “C_CD bell (see FIG. 19)”. It is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols has been displayed. If it is determined that the answer is correct in the pressing order according to the pressing order bell (YES), the sub CPU 81 discards (invalidates) the lottery result (S583) and ends the CZ lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the answer is not correct in the pressing order according to the pressing order bell (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the ART is won (S584). If it is determined that the ART has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S587), and ends the CZ random lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ART has been won (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the enemy-determined ART of the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S585). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89, randomly determines the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of the ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S586). When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ in-lot lottery result management process.

<Process when receiving bonus end command>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving a bonus end command executed in S410 of the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 121.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery transition (F) to the ART based on the current BB mode with reference to the ART lottery table at the end of BB shown in FIG. 86 (S591). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART has been won (S592). When it is determined that the ART has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S593). If both S592 and S593 are NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S596), and ends the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command.

  On the other hand, if YES in either one of S592 and S593, the sub CPU 81 sets the enemy determination ART in the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S594). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 89, randomly determines the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of the ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S595). When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command.

[Effect of Pachislot 1]
The pachislo 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot 1, the following effects can be expected.

<Effect of JACIN carried over during bonus status>
In the pachislot 1, if any of the combinations related to JACIN (“F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, “F_JACIN3”) is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (while the carryover is being performed). ), A bonus state RT4 game state is set. In the bonus state RT4 gaming state, JAC1 replays such as “F_J1 upper 7 lip” to “F_J1 cross 7 lip”, JAC2 replays such as “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip”, and “F_FJ3” A JAC3-related replay such as "chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" can be determined as an internal winning combination (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

  In the pachislot 1, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed based on the gaming state and the internal winning combination. For example, if a JAC1 replay is determined as an internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination, in the game, two types of roles, “F_JACIN1” and a JAC1 replay, are used internally. If the replay of the JAC1 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN2” is carried over as the internal winning combination, the game is determined to be “F_JACIN2”. This means that two types of winning combinations, JAC1 type replays, are determined as internal winning combinations.

  Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the stop control can be made different depending on the type of the role of the carryover JACIN. When the replay of the JAC1 system to the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination, The stop control is performed so that the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in 46 is displayed. By making the privilege (ART) given to the player different by using such control, in the pachislot 1, it is possible to make a difference whether or not the privilege is given according to the type of the carryover combination. The game in the state can be diversified, and the interest in the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46, when the replay of the JAC1 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN1” is carried over as the internal winning combination, “7-set lip” is displayed, and “F_JACIN2” is displayed. If the JAC1 replay is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where the internal winning combination has been carried over, “normal lip” is displayed. By making the stop control different between the situation where the privilege is given and the situation where the privilege is not given, it is possible to know whether or not the privilege is given from the combination of the displayed symbols. The player has a strong interest in the combination of the displayed symbols, and can increase the interest in the game during the bonus state.

  In addition, referring to FIG. 46, in the pachislot 1, stop control capable of displaying “7-set lip” is performed only in the case of the JAC1 system replay, and in the case of the JAC2 system replay or the JAC3 system replay, Stop control that cannot display “7 sets of rips” is performed. In this regard, even in the case of a JAC2 system replay or a JAC3 system replay, the stop control may be performed so that “7 aligned rips” can be displayed. Specifically, when the replay of the JAC2 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN2” is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying “7-set lip” is performed, and “F_JACIN1” is performed. Alternatively, if the replay of the JAC2 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN3” is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control that cannot display “7-set lip” is performed. Similarly, when the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN3” is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying “7-set lip” is performed, and “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN1” or “ When the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where the “F_JACIN2” is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that “7-set lip” cannot be displayed.

  Then, when “7 sets of rips” can be displayed, by referring to the ART random determination table at the time of start during BB shown in FIG. Whether or not to give a privilege can be made different depending on the type, and the interest of the game during the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the probability that the privilege is given by making the probabilities that the JAC1 replay, the JAC2 replay, and the JAC3 replay are determined as the internal winning combinations differ from each other. Can be provided, and the interest in the game during the bonus state can be enhanced.

  Note that the combination relationship between a carryover combination and a winning combination that can display “7 sets of lips” is arbitrary. For example, for a JAC1 type replay, the carryover role that can display “7-set lip” is only “F_JACIN1”, and for a JAC2 type replay, a carryover role that can display “7-set lip”. There may be two types of “F_JACIN1” and “F_JACIN2”, and for a JAC3 type replay, the carryover combination that can display “7 sets of rips” may be all of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3”. Of course, the present invention is not limited to such a combination, and may be an arbitrary combination.

<Effects of the high-probability game state>
In the pachislot 1, an RT4 gaming state is provided as a high RT state in which the combination relating to replay is determined to be an internal winning combination with a high probability, and when a transition to the ART is won, information of an advantageous stop operation in this RT4 gaming state is notified. By doing so, the ART gaming state is realized (see FIG. 55). Note that, in the pachislot 1, the state shifts to the RT4 game state when the answer is correct in the pressing order according to the pressing order lip during the RT0 game state. In the pachislot 1, if the transition to the ART has not been won and the player accidentally transitions to the RT4 gaming state due to a stop operation, the transition to the ART also occurs in the RT4 gaming state that is accidentally transitioned without being treated as a penalty. A lottery that is advantageous to the player such as a lottery is performed. Since the RT4 gaming state is a high RT state, it is possible to play a game without consuming medals. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the RT4 gaming state that has not won the ART is set to the ART transition chance section. It is possible to enhance the interest during the high RT state in which the privilege is not given.

  In addition, since the lottery for transition to the ART is performed during the RT4 gaming state, the strategy for the stop operation during the normal gaming state is increased, and the interest during the normal gaming state can be enhanced. Specifically, in a pachislot that treats a case where the player has accidentally shifted to the RT4 game state by a stop operation as a penalty, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation so as not to receive a penalty). Must be performed on the left reel). In this regard, the pachislot 1 does not impose a penalty during the RT4 game state that has been shifted to by accident, so that the player can freely perform a stop operation during the normal game state, and can perform only the playability during the normal game state. Operability can also be improved.

  In addition, in the pachislo 1, as long as there is an avoidance point, information of an advantageous stop operation in the RT4 gaming state that has accidentally shifted to (push order for avoiding shifting to the RT1 gaming state) is notified. Thus, if the game player accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state, the game does not immediately shift to the normal game state, and for a predetermined period, the player can receive the lottery for shifting to the ART with a high replay winning probability. .

  Note that by setting the RT4 gaming state to a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning the transition to ART is high, it is possible to make the RT4 gaming state shifted by chance into a transition chance section to ART, and a benefit is provided. Enhancement during a high RT state that is not performed can be enhanced.

  In the pachislot 1, an RT0 game state that can be shifted to the RT4 game state and an RT1 game state that cannot be shifted to the RT4 game state are provided as the normal game state. In the pachislot, it is necessary to adjust the balance between the player's profit and the game store's profit so as not to give excessive profit to either the player or the game store. In this regard, the pachislot 1 according to the present invention in which the accidentally shifted RT4 gaming state is shifted to the ART chance section and the other gaming machines in which the accidentally shifted RT4 gaming state shifts to the penalty interval are compared. The pachislo 1 according to the present invention is more advantageous for a player than other gaming machines. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, by providing an RT1 game state that cannot be shifted to the RT4 game state, it is possible to adjust the balance between both benefits. As a result, it is possible to diversify variables for adjusting the balance between both profits, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is rich in gaming properties.

<Effect of apocalypse during normal game state (high-probability game state)>
The pachislot 1 has a complete run type CZ as an ART chance zone. When the apocalypse is activated during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to the CZ when the reel is stopped is performed. The shift lotteries (A) and (D) have a probability according to the effect balls (lottery balls 1 to 4 and fixed balls) set in the apocalypse when the combination of the displayed symbols is “bell winning” or more. Done. As described above, the transfer lottery (A) and (D) are performed in consideration of not only the contents of the effect (the effect ball set in the apocalypse) but also the combination of the symbols displayed as a result of the game, thereby shifting the game state. , The operation of the player can be interposed, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  Further, since the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to the CZ when the reel is stopped is performed when the combination of the displayed symbols is equal to or more than the "bell winning", the rare combination as the internal winning combination during the apocalypse operation. Even if it is not determined, the player can receive the shift lottery (A) (D). Therefore, it is possible to give more opportunities to have a sense of expectation as compared with the case of performing the lottery of the game state based on the rare combination, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The operation of the apocalypse ends when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0. However, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the guaranteed number is subtracted at the time of pressing the bell in the pushing order, so that during the operation of the apocalypse, the player is not given to the player. The opportunity to receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) for the guaranteed number of times is given (the player can receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) by correctly answering in the pressing order at this opportunity). . As a result, according to the pachislo 1, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no opportunity to receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) during the apocalypse operation, and to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced. it can. Referring to FIG. 67 (C), the guaranteed number of times is also subtracted when the internal winning combination is "losing". In this regard, the guaranteed number of times may be subtracted only in the case of a pushing order bell without subtracting the number of guaranteed times in the case of “outside”, whereby the effect described above becomes clearer.

<Effects of CZ>
The pachislot 1 has a CZ of a complete run type as an ART chance zone. In this CZ, although the transition lottery performed in the middle of the CZ performed at the time of the pressing order bell winning is maintained, even if the transition lottery is performed, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pushing order to the pressing order bell even if the transition lottery is performed. , The transfer lottery becomes invalid, and CZ continues. In such a CZ, since it is possible to receive the lottery for shifting to the ART not only at the time of the pressing order bell winning but also at the time of CZ completion, even if the pressing order bell is not won at all during the CZ, the player Will be given a chance to move to ART, so that the interest in CZ can be improved.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, a more advantageous privilege is given (transition to an advantageous ART) at the time of CZ completion, so that the player cancels the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ performed at the time of the push order bell winning. As a result, the player becomes interested in the combination of the displayed symbols, and the interest in each game in the CZ can be improved. In addition, since the player wants to complete the CZ more advantageously, it is possible to maintain the interest in the CZ to the end.

  In the pachislot 1, an invalid point is given during CZ, and as long as the invalid point remains, the transfer lottery in the middle of CZ is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of receiving a shift lottery at the time of CZ completion, which is more advantageous, and it is possible to improve the interest during CZ.

  Further, the pachislot 1 includes a plurality of CZ modes having different degrees of expectation to win the transfer lottery in the middle of the CZ, and only upgrades the CZ mode according to the number of continuous games in the CZ. As a result, in the pachislot 1, the degree of expectation of ART transition increases as the CZ continues, so that the player has a strong interest in the combination of the symbols displayed in the CZ, and the interest in the CZ increases. Can be improved.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, when an invalid point remains, an effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode is performed. As a result, the player can grasp or guess to what degree the CZ has continued as a result of the continuation, and can enhance the interest in the CZ. The effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode may be performed regardless of the invalid point. That is, the pachi-slot 1 may perform a predetermined effect by comparing the number of games to be shifted from the CZ mode 0 to the CA mode 1 specified in CZ_MAP with the number of CZ continuous games up to the present.

<Effect of BB mode during bonus state>
The pachislot 1 includes a plurality of BB modes having different degrees of expectation to win the lottery transition to the ART during the bonus state, and promotes the BB mode based on the internal winning combination during the bonus state. As described above, the probability of winning the lottery transition to the ART based on the internal winning combination in the bonus state is changed, so that the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the bonus state. , The interest in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the pachislot 1, in the BB mode with a low expectation of winning the transfer lottery, the BB mode is upgraded with many winning combinations, whereas in the BB mode with a high expectation of winning the transfer lottery, a small number of types of winning combinations are raised. BB mode can only be upgraded. As a result, as the BB mode is upgraded, the types of winning combinations to be promoted to the higher BB mode are reduced, but as the BB mode is promoted, the degree of expectation to win the shift lottery is increased. It is possible to create a game form that is upgraded to. For the player, instead of being interested in one game result in the bonus state, he will be interested in a series of game results in the bonus state, and to increase interest in the bonus state Can be.

  The upgrade of the BB mode may be performed only one stage at a time, or a plurality of stages may be upgraded at a time. In the case where control is performed such that the upgrade can be performed only one step at a time, the degree of expectation during staying in the BB mode having a low degree of expectation to win the shift lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the upgrade can be performed in a plurality of steps at once. Since it is easy to upgrade from the mode, it is easy to create a game mode in which the gaming state is gradually upgraded.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, in the bonus state, if a JAC2 system replay or a JAC3 system replay is determined as an internal winning combination, it is handled as “chan lip” according to the type of the carryover combination carried over as the internal winning combination. In some cases, it is treated as a replay (see FIG. 81). Then, the BB mode is promoted when treated as “chan lip”, and the BB mode is not promoted when treated as “replay”. As a result, the games in the bonus state can be diversified, and the interest in the bonus state can be enhanced.

<Effect of enemy-determined ART>
In the pachislot 1, a boss ball is set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART, and an enemy character to compete in the battle ART is determined according to the type of the boss ball set at the time of winning the push order bell. During the battle ART, the reduction amount of the HP of the ally character and the reduction amount of the HP of the enemy character are changed according to the type of the enemy character. As a result, the result of the game during the enemy-determined ART affects the continuation of the ART gaming state, and thus the player's interest in the continuation of the ART gaming state can be maintained over a plurality of games. it can.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, since both the attack power and the defense power are set for the enemy character, both the reduction amount of the HP of the ally character and the reduction amount of the HP of the enemy character are individually set for each enemy character. Can be set. As a result, various types of enemy characters such as an enemy character having both high attack power and high defense power, an enemy character having only one of high enemy characters, and an enemy character having low both of them can be employed. The game during the battle ART can be diversified according to the result of the game.

  In the pachislot 1, a speed is also set for the enemy character, and the frequency at which the enemy character attacks during the battle ART is determined based on the speed set for the enemy character. Thereby, the game during the battle ART can be further diversified according to the result of the game during the enemy determination ART.

  In the pachislot 1, the HP of the ally character is added during the enemy determination ART. As a result, when a lot of additions are made, it becomes easy to avoid that the HP of the ally character becomes 0 during the battle ART, and the degree of expectation that the ART gaming state is continued increases. Become. As a result, not only the game during the battle ART but also the game during the enemy-determined ART affects the continuation of the ART gaming state, and thus the player's interest in the continuation of the ART gaming state is determined by a plurality of games. Can last for a long time.

  In the pachislot 1, when the HP of the ally character is less than the initial value during the enemy determination ART, the HP of the ally character is set to the initial value. As a result, the HP of the ally character becomes at least the initial value in the subsequent battle ART, so that it is possible to prevent the HP of the ally character from immediately becoming 0 during the battle ART, and as a result, the continued ART advantageous state is immediately obtained. The termination can be prevented.

  In the pachislot 1, the HP of the ally character during the enemy-determining ART is added according to the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Thereby, for example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the additional amount can be increased, so that the rare combination is not wasted and the interest during the enemy-determining ART is improved. Can be.

<Effects of Battle ART>
In the pachislot 1, an enemy ball or an ally ball is set in the apocalypse during the battle ART, and the HP of the enemy character or the ally character is reduced depending on the type of the effect ball set at the time of the pressing order bell winning. If the enemy character's HP becomes 0 before the ally character's HP becomes 0, the ART is continued, and if the ally character's HP first becomes 0, the ART is terminated. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the player's start operation, the player actively participates in the game during the battle ART, and the desire for the game can be improved. .

  Also, the target for decreasing the HP according to the bell in the order of pressing differs depending on the effect ball set in the apocalypse. Here, in the apocalypse, the effect ball up to the game of a plurality of destinations is set, so the player can play the game after grasping the set effect ball, a timing advantageous to the player side With this, you want to win the push order bell. This makes it possible to strongly associate the effect ball with the player's start operation, and to make the player play a game with a sense of tension, thereby improving the interest during the battle ART.

  Further, since the pushing sequence for decreasing the HP is the winning combination of the notification object during the battle ART, the determination of the pressing sequence bell as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the battle ART. Will be. For example, depending on the gaming machine, the winning combination that reduces the HP of the ally character may be set as the replay, and the winning combination that decreases the HP of the enemy character may be set as the pressing order bell. However, in such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of the winning combination that affects the profit is directly connected to the continuation of the ART, and the game becomes monotonous. In this regard, the playability during the battle ART is diversified by making the winning of the push order bell that affects the profit, like the pachislot 1, advantageous or disadvantageous according to the set effect ball. It is possible to enhance interest during the battle ART.

  In the pachislot 1, when the so-called rare combination is won, the HP of the enemy character is reduced regardless of the set effect ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rare role from being wasted, and the player expects that the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination during the battle ART, thereby increasing the interest during the battle ART. Can be.

  In the pachi-slot 1, if four enemy balls are continuously set during the battle ART, a friend ball is always set next. This can prevent a situation that is disadvantageous for the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game during the battle ART with confidence.

[Modification]
As described above, the pachislo 1 according to the present embodiment has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the pachislot of the above embodiment, when the effect ball is set in the apocalypse, it is set on condition that the internal winning combination is "bell winning" or more, or the combination of displayed symbols is "bell winning" or more. Lottery or the like based on the effect ball being performed. In this regard, when an effect ball is set in the apocalypse, lottery or the like based on the effect ball may be performed irrespective of the internal winning combination or the combination of the displayed symbols. In such a pachislot, the game balance can be adjusted by adjusting the frequency of setting a blank (empty) in the apocalypse.

  In the pachi-slot of the above embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 manages the transition control to the advantageous state (for example, the “ART state”), the duration of the advantageous state, and the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state. Although the management is performed, one or all of these controls may be performed by the main control circuit 41.

  Note that the transition control to the advantageous state includes, for example, control (transition lottery) relating to transition to / not to transition to the advantageous state. In addition, for example, in the case of the pachislot 1 in which a plurality of states having different winning probabilities are provided in the lottery transition to the advantageous state, control relating to transition between the states can be included in the transition control to the advantageous state.

  Further, the management of the duration of the advantageous state is control relating to the increase or decrease of the HP of the enemy character and the ally character in the above-described embodiment, and in the case of other pachislots, for example, the initial game number of the advantageous state is reduced. Determination and additional control of the number of AT games. Further, for example, in the case of the pachislot 1 in which the advantageous state continues with a predetermined probability, a lottery as to whether or not to continue can be included in the management of the duration of the advantageous state.

  In addition, as the duration of the advantageous state, the number of unit games in the advantageous state, the number of times of notifying the player of advantageous information during the advantageous state, the number of medals awarded in the advantageous state, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine An arbitrary period such as the number of sets when the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is one set can be included.

  At this time, as the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state, a net increase in number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game may be used. Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may be calculated based on medals actually increased during the advantageous state (calculation based on actual values), and regardless of whether the number has actually increased. Alternatively, the calculation may be performed based on the number of medals that are to be increased when following the navigation (calculation using an ideal value). Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some of the combinations that have a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or a combination in which the display / non-display of a combination of symbols is switched according to the timing of the stop operation, the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Alternatively, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased or decreased.

  In addition, the management of the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state includes control for notifying the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player by using the liquid crystal display device 10 or the like.

  Further, the mode of the stop operation to be notified to the player may be a stop operation order (push order) in which a combination of symbols advantageous for the player is displayed, or the combination of the symbols is displayed. It may be the timing of the stop operation necessary for this (a design to be aimed at).

  In addition, as an advantageous state, a winning operation mode of an internal winning combination related to a re-game is not changed (or is changed within a range that does not affect the playability), and a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is set. It is also possible to use a so-called "AT" for notifying, and to activate a replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay is increased, and to perform a stop operation advantageous to the player. A so-called “ART” for notifying the above mode may be used.

  Further, in the pachislo of the embodiment or the various modified examples, the effect determined with a predetermined probability according to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 41, that is, one or more effects for one internal winning combination. I am going to do. In this regard, a display (notification) uniquely corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 41 may be performed together with the effect. Specifically, the display corresponding to the determined internal winning combination on a one-to-one basis may be performed on the 7-segment display 6 or a display unit (not shown) for displaying the internal winning combination. The display of the internal winning combination is preferably performed under the control of the main control circuit 41. By notifying the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 41 by the main control circuit 41 itself, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness.

[Appendix 1]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation. The number of navigation games).

  In recent years, a predetermined condition triggers a high-probability replay state (RT) in which a probability that a replay (re-game) that can be played without inserting medals is determined as an internal winning combination is increased. Gaming machines that operate are also known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-204875 discloses a gaming machine that activates a high-probability re-game state when a bonus state ends.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the high-probability re-game state operates after the bonus ends, so that the game can be performed without reducing the medal after the bonus ends, but the high-probability re-game state always occurs after the bonus ends. There is a possibility that the game during the bonus becomes monotonous. Therefore, there is a need for a gaming machine that operates in the high-probability re-game state after the bonus ends, so that the game during the bonus does not become monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a game in a special game state.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , Display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the symbol by performing the special game, which is a normal state and a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state. The game state is switched by an internal lottery table provided corresponding to a plurality of game states including a state (for example, a bonus state) and a predetermined condition. The internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations by referring to an internal lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state based on the detection of the start operation by the exchange means (for example, the main control circuit 41) and the start operation detection unit. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel 41, a stop switch 17S), and stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which a stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit; Whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol displaying means when the pattern change is stopped or not. (For example, the main control circuit 41), and the internal lottery table provided corresponding to the special game state is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. During the special gaming state, any of a plurality of carryover combinations (for example, F_JACIN1 to 3) that can be carried over as an internal winning combination until the winning determination unit determines that a winning is achieved can be determined as an internal winning combination. In the special gaming state, when the first carryover role (for example, F_JACIN1) of the plurality of carryover roles is carried over as an internal winning combination, When a predetermined combination (for example, F_J1 upper 7 lip to F_J1 cross 7 lip) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a privilege (for example, a winning in an ART transfer lottery) is provided, and the first carryover combination is provided. In the case where a second carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN2) different from the above is carried over as an internal winning combination, if the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege providing means (for example, the sub control circuit 42) which does not provide the privilege ) Is further provided.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can carry over any of a plurality of carryover combinations as an internal winning combination during the special gaming state. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the privilege is given when the first carryover is carried over, and the privilege is not given when the second carryover is carried over. . With this, even if the predetermined combination is internally won, it is possible to vary whether or not to grant the privilege according to the type of the carryover combination, and it is possible to diversify the game in the special game state. This can enhance the interest of the game during the special game state.

[Appendix 2]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in the gaming machine having the ART function, even in the case where the transition to the advantageous state has not been determined, the operation of the high-probability re-game state may be performed by the stop operation of the player. In this regard, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233721), if the transition to the advantageous state is not determined, information that is advantageous to the player during the high-probability re-game state is not notified, It is described that control to fall from the probability replay state to the normal state is performed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, the control of falling from the high-probability replay state to the normal state when the transition to the advantageous state has not been determined is used as a so-called penalty, and the stop operation of the player accidentally causes the high-probability replay state. In general, when the operation is performed, the lottery itself for shifting to the advantageous state is not performed.

  However, even if the gaming state is the high-probability re-game state, if the transition to the advantageous state is not performed by lottery, the high-probability re-game state in which the privilege is not provided (for example, the RT during the non-winning state of the ART). It lacks the fun of (middle).

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest in games to which no privilege is given.

[Means for solving the problem]

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the normal state (for example, the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state) where the replay related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination and the probability that the replay is determined as the internal winning combination are determined. A gaming machine having a high RT state (for example, an RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, wherein a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the displayed symbols, start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S), On the basis of the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the symbol is changed by rotating the reel (for example, the main control circuit 41, a step changer). The first symbol combination (for example, RT4 transition lip) in accordance with the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. Alternatively, the third symbol combination (for example, RT1 transition lip) can be stopped and displayed in the first pressing sequence (for example, pressing sequence lip), and the third symbol combination is determined according to the order of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination. The second symbol combination (for example, a bell in a push order) that can stop and display the symbol combination (for example, a bell spilled eye) or the fourth symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed at the time of a correct answer in a push order) is included. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations, and a stop provided for the plurality of reels for stopping each reel Operation (For example, the main control circuit 41, the stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. A reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the rotation of the reel to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and Determining means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided on the symbol display means based on the stop of the fluctuation; It is determined that the first symbol combination of the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination according to the first pushing sequence has been stopped by the means. When set, the RT start means (for example, the main control circuit 41) which shifts the gaming state from the normal state to the high RT state, and the determination means during the high RT state causes the second pushing to be performed. When it is determined that the third symbol combination of the corresponding third symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination has stopped, the gaming state is shifted from the high RT state to the normal state, If it is determined that the symbol combination of No. 4 has stopped, RT termination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for maintaining the high RT state, and a predetermined lottery performed during the normal state or the high RT state (for example, , A transition to ART, a special production state transition unit (for example, a sub-control) that transitions the production state relating to the game to a specific production state (for example, an ART gaming state) that informs information of an advantageous stop operation. (Road 42), and when the RT start means shifts the gaming state to the high RT state in a state in which the predetermined lottery is not won, the second pressing order is determined to be the internal winning combination. The number-of-notifications determining means (for example, sub-control) that determines the number of notifications (for example, the number of guarantees) for notifying the information of the stop operation (for example, the order of pressing the correct answer to the pressing order bell) necessary to stop the symbol combination of No. 4 Circuit 42), and when the specific effect state shifting means shifts to the specific effect state, the first symbol combination is stopped when the first pressing combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal state. In addition to notifying the information of the stop operation necessary to perform the operation, the information of the advantageous stop operation is notified during the high RT state, and the second push is performed during the high RT state in which the predetermined lottery is not won. The leading role is the internal winning combination And a notifying means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42, the liquid crystal display device 10) for notifying the information of the stop operation which is advantageous only for the number of times of the notification determined by the number of times of the notification determined. .

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state in which the replay relating to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low and a high RT state in which the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high. By notifying the information of the advantageous stop operation in the specific effect state inside, a gaming state (so-called ART) advantageous to the player can be realized. Here, the transition to the specific effect state is performed not only by a predetermined lottery performed during the normal state but also by a predetermined lottery performed during the high RT state. Even if the state shifts to the high RT state in the absence state, the shift to the specific effect state can be expected thereafter. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, a high RT state in which a predetermined lottery has not been won can be set as a transition chance section to a favorable gaming state (so-called ART), and a privilege is provided. It is possible to enhance interest during a high RT state where no (the predetermined lottery is not won).

  In addition, since the predetermined lottery is performed during the high RT state, the strategy for the stop operation during the normal state is increased, and the interest during the normal state can be enhanced. That is, in the gaming ability in which a penalty is imposed during the high RT state in which the privilege is not provided as in the conventional gaming machine, the stop operation during the normal state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed so as not to receive the penalty). Must be done for the left reel). In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the predetermined lottery is performed without imposing a penalty during the high RT state, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal state, and can perform the stop operation during the normal state. The operability as well as the playability can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the third symbol combination corresponding to the second pushing role is stopped during the high RT state, the high RT state is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the normal state. If a transition is made to the high RT state in a state in which the lottery has not been won, information on advantageous stop operations (for example, necessary to stop the fourth symbol combination when the second pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination) Is notified a predetermined number of times. Thus, when the player accidentally shifts to the high RT state by the stop operation, the player does not immediately shift from the high RT state to the normal state, and receives a predetermined lottery in a state where the replay winning probability is high. be able to.

[Appendix 3]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed to transition to the ART state with a high probability when a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. . For example, in Patent Literature (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed at in the chance zone (CZ), and when a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. A gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document, the player's interest in the chance zone concentrates on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a chance that the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such a possibility may be significantly reduced. In such a case, for the player, no chance is obtained even though the player has shifted to the chance zone, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. A first symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed at the time of the correct answer in the pressing order) or a second symbol combination (for example, bell spilling eyes) is determined according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations including a pressing sequence (for example, a pressing sequence bell) which can be stopped and displayed; Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to the reel and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning determined by the internal winning combination determining means. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the role and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, thereby stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. A combination of a reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 41) and a symbol stopped on an effective line provided in the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stop switch 17S) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on predetermined conditions. A lottery state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for starting a transitional lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a transitional lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the above-mentioned advantageous state lottery state When the pressing sequence is determined as an internal winning combination by means, a first transition lottery (for example, in the middle of CZ) in which transition to the advantageous state is decided with a predetermined probability is determined. A second transfer lottery (for example, a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 30 games) in the advantageous state lottery state) is determined with a specific probability. Advantageous state lottery means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for performing ART transfer lottery performed at the time of CZ completion, and the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game in which the first transfer lottery is performed. Then, the first shift lottery is invalidated regardless of the shift lottery result to the advantageous state, and when the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game, the first shift lottery is displayed. A lottery result managing means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for maintaining the lottery result of the first shift lottery state in the advantageous state lottery state, and the lottery result managing means When the lottery result of the first shift lottery is maintained, or when the predetermined number of unit games have elapsed, the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for ending the advantageous state lottery state; When the transition to the advantageous state is determined by the first transition lottery or the second transition lottery, an advantageous state transition unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) that transitions the state of playing a game to the advantageous state is provided. The advantageous state transition means is more advantageous when the transition to the advantageous state is determined by the second transition lottery than when the transition to the advantageous state is determined by the first transition lottery. A transition is made to an advantageous state (for example, an ART game state of a more advantageous ART state).

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which a transition to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is performed, the first pressing is determined as an internal winning combination when the first pressing combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A transfer lottery is performed. The advantageous state lottery state ends when the first transition lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained or when a predetermined number of unit games elapse. As described above, in the gaming machine that performs the transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive the first transition lottery at all during the advantageous state lottery state. In the gaming machine, the second shift lottery is performed when a predetermined number of unit games elapse in the advantageous state lottery state. Thereby, even if the pressing sequence is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, the transition lottery to the advantageous state can be always received, and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. .

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the pressing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination, but the first shift lottery is performed when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation. Is invalidated, and conversely, when the second symbol combination is displayed, the result of the first shift lottery is maintained. According to such control, the player is interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the pushing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore, the interest in each game in the advantageous state lottery state is increased. Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state in which the transition is made via the second transition lottery is more advantageous than the advantage state in which the transition is made via the first transition lottery. It is desired that a predetermined number of unit games elapse without the combination being displayed (the first shift lottery is maintained and the advantageous state lottery state is ended), and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state is maintained to the end. it can.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  In addition, many attempts have been made to diversify the transition to the advantageous state (ART). For example, in Patent Document (JP-A-2003-126369), a special role (7 out of BB) is provided during a bonus. There is disclosed a gaming machine which shifts to an advantageous state after the bonus ends when an internal win is made to the "match".

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by Akira]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the transition to the advantageous state is performed based on the result of one internal lottery during the predetermined period (during the bonus). There was a problem that it was difficult to hold. In addition, since it is general that the winning probability of the specific combination which is a trigger to shift to the advantageous state is suppressed to a low value, it is not possible to have an expectation of winning during a predetermined period, and the opportunity to shift to the advantageous state is generated. There is also a possibility that the interest of the game for a certain predetermined period may be spoiled.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations, and a plurality of reels provided for the plurality of reels for stopping each reel. Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a timing at which a stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. And a reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the rotation of the reel to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit. When the change of the symbol is stopped, the internal winning combination deciding means is determined based on a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means. The winning state determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the above is won, and the predetermined condition (for example, the operation of BB) are used as a trigger to shift to the advantageous state. An advantageous state lottery state (for example, a bonus state) in which a shift lottery of whether or not is started is started, and the particular state condition (for example, 59 medals are paid out) in the advantageous state lottery state is used as an opportunity to trigger the advantageous state lottery. A game state control means (for example, main control circuit 41) for ending the state, and an advantageous state lottery means (lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state when the game state control means ends the advantageous state lottery state. For example, when the sub-control circuit 42) and the lottery of the advantageous state lottery means are won, an advantageous state start means (for example, a sub-control Circuit 42), wherein the advantage state lottery state is a first lottery state (for example, BB mode 0) having the lowest probability of winning the shift lottery by the advantage state lottery means, and the probability is the first lottery state. A plurality of states including a second lottery state (for example, BB mode 1) higher than the state and a third lottery state (for example, BB mode 2) whose probability is higher than the first lottery state and the second lottery state. A lottery state (for example, BB mode), and in the advantageous state lottery state, a lottery state transition unit (for example, A sub-control circuit 42), and wherein the lottery state transition means is configured to select one of a first number of roles including a first role and a second role among the plurality of roles in the first lottery state as an internal winning combination. Determined Then, the lottery state transitions from the first lottery state to the second lottery state, and the first lottery including the first role out of the plurality of roles and not including the second role in the second lottery state. A gaming machine, wherein when one of the second numbers smaller than the number is determined as an internal winning combination, the lottery state is changed from the second lottery state to the third lottery state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state is performed at the end of the advantageous state lottery state. At this time, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of lottery states including a first lottery state, a second lottery state, and a third lottery state in which the probability of winning the shift lottery is different, and the inside of the advantageous state lottery state A plurality of lottery states are transited based on the winning combination. This makes it possible to change the probability of winning the shift lottery based on the internal winning combination, so that the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the advantageous state lottery state, and Interest during the state lottery state can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the internal lottery of any of the first number of roles including the first role and the second role is performed in the second lottery state in which the probability of winning the transition lottery from the first lottery state is higher. A transition is made when the combination is determined, and the third lottery state where the probability of winning the transition lottery from the second lottery state is higher is a second number smaller than the first number including the first combination and not including the second combination. The transition is made when any of the combinations is determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, as the lottery state transitions, the type of the role that triggers the transition to the higher-ranking lottery state decreases, but the probability of winning the transition lottery increases with the transition of the lottery state. A game form in which the state is gradually upgraded can be created. To the player, instead of being interested in one internal lottery result in the advantageous state lottery state, he is interested in a series of internal lottery results in the advantageous state lottery state. Interest during the lottery state can be increased.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, games in the advantageous state tend to be monotonous, and in recent years, attempts to diversify the gaming properties in the advantageous state have been widely made. For example, in a patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-152165), a free game is played when a predetermined condition is established, and the number of fighter symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the free game is displayed on a liquid crystal display. A gaming machine has been disclosed in which the number of fighters on the player side of the shooting game displayed in the above is set as the remaining number of fighters, thereby giving a variety of effects and payout forms.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, a free game or an effect (shooting game) is configured to automatically advance under the control of the gaming machine. However, the player could not actively participate in the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving amusement of a game in an advantageous state by making a player actively participate in the game. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (e.g., a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (e.g., a battle ART in an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as the state in which the game is played. A gaming machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the symbol, and a start operation by the start operation detecting means. The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation for stopping, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the detected timing to thereby stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit; When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the control means, based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means has won, and advantageous state starting means for starting the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition When the predetermined combination (for example, the pushing order bell) is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state (for example, the sub control circuit 42), information of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player (for example, a symbol with a large payout number) (For example, the sub-control circuit 42, the liquid crystal display device 10) and first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character) prior to the start of the advantageous state. And numerical value determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for determining second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character); Effect information registering means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games (for example, setting in an apocalypse displayed on the liquid crystal display device 10); When the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which first effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and When the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which the second effect information (for example, an ally ball) is registered, a numerical value updating unit (for example, a secondary update unit) that subtracts a second predetermined value from the second numerical information. As a result of the subtraction by the control circuit 42) and the numerical value updating means, the advantageous state is terminated when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and the advantageous state is renewed when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Advantageously state control means (e.g., the sub-control circuit 42) for starting to the, characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, during the advantageous state, the first numerical information and the second numerical information are subtracted based on the effect information and the internal winning combination, and the second numerical information is reduced before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold. If the numerical information can be reduced below the threshold, the advantageous state is continued. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the player actively participates in the game in the advantageous state, and the motivation for the game can be improved. .

  Further, even when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the target (first numerical information or second numerical information) to be subtracted differs depending on the effect information registered in the game. For the player, since the first numerical information is subtracted in a state where the first effect information is registered, the player does not want to win the predetermined combination, and conversely, when the second effect information is registered. Means that a predetermined combination is to be won. Here, the effect information is registered for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, the player can play the game after grasping the effect information registered in advance, This means that the player wants to win the predetermined combination at a timing advantageous to the player (the second effect information is registered). This makes it possible to strongly associate the registered production information with the player's start operation, and to make the player play a game with a sense of tension, thereby improving interest in the advantageous state. it can.

  Since the predetermined combination from which the first numerical information or the second numerical information is subtracted is a notification target combination, the determination of the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination does not affect the profit given during the advantageous state. Will give. For example, depending on the gaming machine, the combination from which the first numerical information is subtracted is a first combination (such as a replay) that does not affect the profit, and the combination from which the second numerical information is subtracted is the first combination that affects the profit. It is also conceivable to assume two roles (bell etc.). In such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of the winning of the second role that affects the profit is directly connected to the continuation of the advantageous state, and the game becomes monotonous. In this regard, as in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the winning of the predetermined combination which affects the profit is made advantageous / disadvantage according to the registered effect information, so that the gaming property in the advantageous state is improved. It can be diversified, and can enhance interest in the advantageous state.

[Appendix 6]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is common to shift the gaming state based on winning or winning of a so-called rare combination such as watermelon or cherry. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), RT operation symbols 1 and 2 displayed when cherries 1, 2, and 3 are determined as an internal winning combination are displayed during a predetermined period. It is disclosed that the game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the operation of the player is reflected in the result of the game by shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery as in the patent document. It is possible to realize a game in which the player actively participates in the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since so-called rare combinations such as watermelon and cherry have a low winning probability, when the gaming state is shifted according to the presence or absence of the rare combination as in the gaming machine of Patent Document, depending on the player, even once during the period. There is a possibility that a chance may not be obtained, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, there is also a conceivable gaming property in which a game state is shifted regardless of a player's operation, but such a gaming machine departs from a pachislot machine's original gaming ability in which a game proceeds in accordance with a player's operation. In this case, a decision that affects the profit to be given is made, so that the game machine lacks suitability as a pachislot machine, and may impair the fairness of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting a gaming state rich in gaming properties while relating the gaming state to a game result.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which the game is played. A gaming machine having a chance zone (for example, CZ) having a high probability of shifting to the advantageous state, wherein a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed; Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the display, and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a start operation by the player. Based on the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 41, step Motors 61L, 61C, 61R) and a first symbol combination (for example, when the pressing order is correct) in accordance with the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Among a plurality of roles including a push sequence (for example, a push sequence bell) in which a displayed symbol combination) or a second symbol combination (for example, a design sequence displayed when the push sequence is incorrect) can be stopped and displayed. And an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of reels, and a stop detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. A stop operation is detected by the operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 41, the stop switch 17S), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing to thereby stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit; Whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol displaying means when the change of the symbol is stopped. And a CZ lottery state (for example, a main control circuit 41) for performing a transfer lottery to the chance zone when a predetermined condition (for example, an apocalypse lottery is won) is satisfied in the normal state. A lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting an apocalypse normal game state) and a predetermined number of times from the current game during the CZ lottery state. Effect information registering means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and confirmed balls) in a plurality of games up to a few games ahead; When the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in a registered game, a CZ lottery for performing a lottery transition to the chance zone with a probability according to the effect information registered for the game Based on the means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42, the reel lottery table at the time of reel stop in FIG. 72) and the result of the shift lottery of the CZ lottery means, a game state control means (for example, The sub control circuit 42) terminates the CZ lottery state when the pressing sequence is determined as a predetermined number of times as an internal winning combination during the CZ lottery state (for example, when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0). To lottery state ending means (e.g., the sub-control circuit 42) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state is shifted from the CZ lottery state to the chance zone based on the effect information registered in advance for a predetermined number of games including the current game. Here, the production information is registered irrespective of the operation of the player, so simply shifting the gaming state based on the production information lacks suitability as a gaming machine and impairs the fairness of the game. There is a possibility that it will. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state is shifted in consideration of not only the effect information registered for each game but also the combination of symbols displayed in the game. Thereby, the operation of the player can be interposed in the transition of the game state, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  Here, the first symbol combination that triggers the transition of the gaming state is a symbol combination that is displayed when the pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to provide the player with more opportunities to have a sense of expectation regarding the transition to the gaming state as compared with the case where the opportunity is triggered. That is, in the first symbol combination requiring not only the winning as the internal winning combination but also the order of the stop operation, the winning probability can be set to be higher than that of the rare winning combination. The winning combination can be given as many as the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the lottery of the transition of the gaming state is performed with a probability corresponding to the effect information registered for the game in which the first symbol combination is displayed, the operation is performed by the player. The transition of the game state can be performed in various modes while being associated with the result of the accompanying game. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform the transition of the gaming state in a manner that is rich in gaming properties while associating the gaming state with the result of the gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the CZ lottery state ends when the pressing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination a predetermined number of times during the CZ lottery state. In this way, by using the pushing sequence that is the trigger for transition of the gaming state to the end condition of the CZ lottery state, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to receive the transition lottery during the CZ lottery state. As a result, the player can avoid a situation in which there is no opportunity to receive the transfer lottery, and can prevent the interest of the game from being reduced.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed to transition to the ART state with a high probability when a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. . For example, in Patent Literature (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed at in the chance zone (CZ), and when a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. A gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document, the player's interest in the chance zone concentrates on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a chance that the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such a possibility may be significantly reduced. In such a case, for the player, no chance is obtained even though the player has shifted to the chance zone, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations, and a stop provided for the plurality of reels for stopping each reel Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) for detecting an operation, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a timing at which a stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the rotation of the reel to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol stop control means for stopping the rotation of the reel. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the internal winning combination determining means is determined based on a combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol displaying means. The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the determined internal winning combination has won, and a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. A lottery state start means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ), and a winning mode (for example, CZ) for defining a probability of determining to shift to the advantageous state in the shift lottery. Mode) based on the number of unit games that have passed in the advantageous state lottery state (for example, the sub control circuit 42), and a predetermined combination ( For example, if the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, an advantageous state lottery means (for example, a sub-control) that performs the shift lottery based on the current winning mode. A control circuit 42), a lottery state ending means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for terminating the advantageous state lottery state when the transitional lottery is performed by the advantageous state lottery means, and entering the advantageous state by the transitional lottery. When it is determined that the game state is to be shifted, the game state is shifted to the advantageous state by an advantageous state shifting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42). Based on the number of unit games performed, shifting from the first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) having the lowest probability to a second mode (for example, CZ mode 1) having a higher probability than the first mode, and When the number of unit games passed in the advantageous state lottery state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30), a third mode (for example, CZ mode 2) having the highest probability is obtained. When the lottery state start means starts the advantageous state lottery state, the mode shifting means determines the number of unit games to be shifted from the first mode to the second mode (eg, CZ_MAP). , Sub-control circuit 42).

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the transition to the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is performed, the transitional lottery is triggered when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the transfer lottery is performed, the advantageous state lottery state ends. Here, in a gaming machine that performs transition lottery to an advantageous state based on an internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive transition lottery at all during the advantageous state lottery state. Then, as the advantageous state lottery state continues, the winning mode that defines the probability of winning the shift lottery increases, and the shift lottery becomes easier to win. In such a gaming machine, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player that the predetermined combination is not determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state. It is possible to improve the amusement during the advantageous state lottery state.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state starts, the number of unit games for shifting the winning mode from the first mode to the second mode is determined. As a result, the timing at which the winning mode is changed to a mode that is advantageous to the player is different for each advantageous state lottery state, so that the game during the advantageous state lottery state can be diversified, and during the advantageous state lottery state. Interest can be improved.

[Appendix 8]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732) specifies a watermelon or cherry as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when a winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination. He concentrated on only one game and could not maintain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining a player's interest in continuing an advantageous state (AT, ART, or the like) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations, and a plurality of reels provided for the plurality of reels for stopping each reel. Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a timing at which a stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. And a reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the rotation of the reel to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the internal winning combination deciding means is determined based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means. The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the prize has won, the first advantageous state (for example, the enemy-determined ART) and the Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting the advantageous state including a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed after the one advantageous state, and progress of the game in the first advantageous state A first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for controlling, and a second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, The first advantageous state control means registers first effect information registration means (for example, effect balls) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead during the first advantageous state. , The sub-control circuit 42) and the game in which any one of a plurality of types of first effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered as the effect information, the first advantageous state ends, and A second advantageous state start means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for starting a second advantageous state, wherein the second advantageous state control means performs a game a predetermined number of times ahead of the current game during the second advantageous state. Second effect information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games up to, and second effect information (for example, enemy balls) are registered as the effect information. In the game being played, from the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character), the first value corresponding to the type (for example, the attack power of the enemy character) of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state Subtract one number Also, in a game in which third effect information (for example, an ally ball) is registered as the effect information, the second numerical information (for example, HP of the enemy character) is registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information. Numerical value subtracting means (for example, sub-control circuit 42) for subtracting a second numerical value according to the type of first effect information (for example, the defense strength of the enemy character), and the first numerical value as a result of the subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means. An advantageous state continuation judging means (for example, the sub control circuit 42) for terminating the advantageous state when the information becomes less than the threshold value and newly starting the first advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state continues for a plurality of games. Will be different depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  The effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. From the viewpoint of the player, the flow of subsequent games can be grasped from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, so that they will be interested in not only the current game but also the subsequent games It is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the subtraction amount of the numerical information is made different depending on the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game in the first advantageous state influences whether or not the advantageous state is continued. Can be sustained throughout the game. In addition, by separately setting the subtraction amount of the first numerical information (first numerical value) and the subtraction amount of the second numerical value (second numerical value), for example, the subtraction amounts of the first numerical information and the second numerical information can both be reduced. It is possible to set the state to be large / small, or to set the amount of subtraction of the first numerical information to be large / small, and to set the amount of subtraction of the second numerical information to be small / large. Can be As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

[Appendix 9]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732) specifies a watermelon or cherry as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when a winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination. He concentrated on only one game and could not maintain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining a player's interest in continuing an advantageous state (AT, ART, or the like) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations, and a plurality of reels provided for the plurality of reels for stopping each reel. Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a timing at which a stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. And a reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the rotation of the reel to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the internal winning combination deciding means is determined based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means. The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the prize has won, the first advantageous state (for example, the enemy-determined ART) and the Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) for starting the advantageous state including a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed after the one advantageous state, and progress of the game in the first advantageous state A first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for controlling, and a second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, The first advantageous state control means registers first effect information registration means (for example, effect balls) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead during the first advantageous state. , A sub-control circuit 42) and a numerical value adding means (for adding a predetermined number to first numerical information (for example, HP of a friendly character) in a game in which first rendering information (for example, friendly ball) is registered as the rendering information. For example, in the game in which the second effect information (for example, boss ball) is registered as the effect information, the first advantageous state ends and the second advantageous state starts in the sub-control circuit 42). State starting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42), wherein the second advantageous state control means provides the effect information in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times earlier during the second advantageous state. A second effect information registering means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42) for registering (for example, an effect ball); and the first numerical value in a game in which third effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information. information The first predetermined value is subtracted from the second predetermined value, and the second predetermined value is obtained from the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) in the game in which the fourth production information (for example, an ally ball) is registered as the production information. When the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold value as a result of the subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42), the advantageous state is ended, and the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. And the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 42) that newly starts the first advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state continues for a plurality of games. Will be different depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  The effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. From the viewpoint of the player, the flow of subsequent games can be grasped from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, so that they will be interested in not only the current game but also the subsequent games It is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first numerical value information which is an end trigger of the advantageous state is added based on the first effect information registered during the first advantageous state. By adding a large amount of the first numerical information during the first advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the first numerical information from decreasing to less than the threshold value in the subsequent second advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game in the first advantageous state influences the continuation of the advantageous state, so that the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state over a plurality of games Can last.

[Appendix 10]
The pachislot 1 in Supplementary Note 10 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732) specifies a watermelon or cherry as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when a winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination. He concentrated on only one game and could not maintain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining a player's interest in continuing an advantageous state (AT, ART, or the like) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (e.g., a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (e.g., a battle ART in an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as the state in which the game is played. A gaming machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, start switch 16S) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 41, stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) for changing the symbol, and a start operation by the start operation detecting means. The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 41) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 41, stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation for stopping, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 41) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the detected timing to thereby stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit; When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the control means, based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 41) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means has won, and advantageous state starting means for starting the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition (For example, the sub-control circuit 42) and determining means (for example, HP of an ally character) and second numerical information (for example, HP of an enemy character) prior to the start of the advantageous state. For example, the sub-control circuit 42) and effect information registration means (for example, sub-control) for registering effect information (eg, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead during the advantageous state. Circuit 42), in a game in which first effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and a second effect is used as the effect information. In a game in which the outgoing information (for example, an ally ball) is registered, a numerical updating means (for example, a sub control circuit 42) for subtracting a second predetermined value from the second numerical information, and a result of the subtraction by the numerical updating means, An advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit) for terminating the advantageous state when the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold and newly starting the advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold; The effect information registering means, if the first effect information is registered as effect information in the plurality of games continuously for a specific number of times (for example, four times), the first effect information for the first consecutive number of times The second effect information is registered as effect information following the effect information.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game, whether or not the advantageous state is continued depends on the game results of a plurality of games. Will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  The effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. From the viewpoint of the player, the flow of subsequent games can be grasped from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, so that they will be interested in not only the current game but also the subsequent games It is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the case where the first effect information, which is a trigger for ending the advantageous state, is registered continuously for a specific number of times, the second effect, which is a continuation trigger for the advantageous state, as subsequent effect information. Register information. This can prevent a situation that is disadvantageous for the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game in the advantageous state with peace of mind.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 22 ... Movable decorative member (Movable role) ), 41: main control circuit, 42: sub control circuit, 51: main CPU, 81: sub CPU

Claims (3)

A game machine having a normal state and an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which the game is played,
A plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed,
Symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reel,
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player;
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel,
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, a first symbol combination or a second symbol combination includes a pressing sequence in which the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be stopped and displayed in accordance with the order of the stop operation when the internal symbol combination is determined. Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations,
A stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel;
The rotation of the reel is stopped on the basis of the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit, thereby being displayed on the symbol display unit. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol,
When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit based on a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display unit. Prize determining means for determining whether or not the role has won,
Triggered by a predetermined condition, a lottery state start means for starting an advantageous state lottery state for performing a shift lottery of whether or not to shift to the advantageous state,
When the internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, a first transition lottery is performed to determine with a predetermined probability that the transition to the advantageous state is performed. Advantageous state lottery means for performing a second shift lottery for determining with a specific probability that the state is shifted to the advantageous state when a predetermined number of unit games elapse in the state;
When the first symbol combination is displayed on the pay line in the unit game in which the first transition lottery is performed, the first transition lottery is invalidated regardless of the transition lottery result to the advantageous state, and the unit When the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the game, a lottery result management means for maintaining a lottery result of the first shift lottery;
In the advantageous state lottery state, when the first transition lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained by the lottery result management means, or when the predetermined number of unit games elapses, Lottery state ending means for ending the advantageous state lottery state;
When the transition to the advantageous state is determined by the first transition lottery or the second transition lottery, an advantageous state transition unit that transitions a state of performing a game to the advantageous state,
With
The advantageous state shifting means is configured to shift to the advantageous state by the second shift lottery, which is more advantageous than when the shift to the advantageous state is determined by the first shift lottery. It is shifted to,
In the above-mentioned advantageous state lottery state, the method further comprises an invalid number determination unit that determines an invalid number for invalidating the first shift lottery,
The lottery result management means invalidates the first shift lottery only for the invalid count regardless of the symbol combination displayed on the activated line.
A gaming machine characterized by that: A game machine having a normal state and an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which the game is played,
Triggered by a predetermined condition, a lottery state start means for starting an advantageous state lottery state for performing a shift lottery as to whether to shift to the advantageous state,
When the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, a first transition lottery is performed in which the transition to the advantageous state is determined with a predetermined probability, and a predetermined number of unit games elapse in the advantageous state lottery state. Then, an advantageous state lottery means for performing a second shift lottery for determining to shift to the advantageous state with a specific probability,
In the unit game in which the first transition lottery is performed, when a predetermined display mode is reached, the first transition lottery is invalidated regardless of the transition lottery result to the advantageous state, and a specific display mode is set in the unit game. A lottery result management means for maintaining a lottery result of the first shift lottery,
In the advantageous state lottery state, when the first transition lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained by the lottery result management means, or when the predetermined number of unit games elapses, Lottery state ending means for ending the advantageous state lottery state;
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous state by the first shift lottery or the second shift lottery, an advantageous state shift unit that shifts a state of performing a game to the advantageous state;
Ineffective number counting means capable of counting the number of invalidations that invalidate the first shift lottery in the advantageous state lottery state ;
With
The lottery result management means, even in the case of the specific display mode, invalidates the first shift lottery only for the invalid number of times,
Yu Technical machine characterized in that. A first mode for shifting to a second mode in which the probability of determining to shift to the advantageous state in the first shift lottery based on the number of unit games passed in the advantageous state lottery state is higher than the first mode; A second mode in which the probability is higher than one mode, and the mode does not shift to a first mode in which the probability is lower than itself.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein: